Home

"user manual"

1. 111 Cargo Vehicle Loading 110 197 CD Compact Disc Player 140 Cellular Phone 61 140 141 147 Certification Label 197 Chains Tire 186 Changing A Flat Tire 212 Charging System Light 125 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 50 Checks Safety 50 Child Booster Seat 43 Child Restraint 41 43 44 48 49 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 46 48 Child Safety Locks 21 Clean Air Gasoline 193 Cleaning Wheels bis be s 244 Windshield Wiper Blades 234 Climate Control 147 ClIOGK a a bedi bh eh deber 141 Coin Holder AA 107 Cold Weather Operation 163 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 146 Compact Spare Tire 184 Compass 130 133 137 Compass Calibration 133 137 Compass Variance 131 137 Computer Trip Travel 135 Connector UCI Ss eee a hu e Le ee BS 143 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 143 Conserving Fuel 135 Console Floor 107 Console Overhead 101 Cool Down Turbo 164 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 239 Cooling System 237 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 238 239 Coolant Capacity 256 Coolant Level 237 239 Diesel ENGINE axem Re Re 237 Disposal of Used Coolant 239 Drain
2. 0 o 50 Overheating 211 Slaltilig x tate eed e eae rem s 162 Temperature Gauge 122 Engine Oil Viscosity 230 231 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 38 Entry System Illuminated 15 Ethanol iom our aee pn eme ta 193 Exhaust Gas Caution 25 51 236 Exhaust System 51 236 Express Down Windows 17 Exterior Folding Mirrors 60 Exterior Light Service 251 Exterior Lights iesu rm 52 251 Fabric Cares s eer oR exa 245 Filters Air Cleaner 0 231 Air Conditioning 155 233 Automatic Transaxle 242 Engine Oil 231 257 Engine Oil Disposal 231 Flashers Hazard Warning 211 Turn Signal 52 94 123 Flash To Pass 94 Flexible Fuel Vehicles Cruising Range 195 Engine Oil 2 2 eke p ed ake 195 Fuel Requirements 194 195 Maintenance cta nd xd 196 Replacement Parts 196 ANG dde O 195 Flooded Engine Starting 163 Floor Console i iss ce ga 107 Fluid Brake ee 9 258 Fluid Capacities 256 Fluid Eeaks oca kw Rd Shee BOK Bk 52 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transaxle 242 Brakes sorg tilde dt A HAs 241 258 Cooling System 237 Engine Oll eoliano 229 Manual Transaxle 243 Power Steering 173 258 Fluids iu esos A nm e vk ma 257
3. Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 262 22 500 Miles 36 000 km or 30 000 Miles 48 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Q Rotate tires filter l Replace the engine air cleaner filter Rotate tires l Replace the spark plugs 2 4L Engine T Inspect the CV joints JJ Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary T Inspect the exhaust system 1 Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped T Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends 11 Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes and boot seals and replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 263 37 500 Miles 60 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Tt Rotate tires 1 Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 105 000 miles 168 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 45 000 Miles 72 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine o
4. 140 000 Miles 210 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Inspect accessory drive belt replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals and replace if necessary OOC C O C Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 150 000 Miles 225 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the fuel filter 1 Change manual transaxle fluid 1 Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 290 T Performing the engine oil change indicator system reset procedure described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC or under Odometer Trip Odometer in Sec tion 3 of this manual allows for a 10 000 mile 15 000 km service interval for engine oil and filter changes The oil change indicator system
5. 1 Grocery Retainers 2 Map Storage In Floor Storage Bin with Removable Liner NOTE Position the front seat to at least a mid track position to provide easier access to the storage bin An in floor storage bin is located behind each front seat Each 1 6 gal 5 9 I bin can hold up to 12 12 oz 0 35 cans plus ice or other items The removable bin liner allows for easy filling emptying and cleaning E ne In Floor Storage Bin To access the bin position the floor mat aside if equipped Pull the door latch release loop upward to release the latch and then forward to open the bin door The liner can be removed for easy cleaning by lifting on the notches as shown Removable Liner CHILL ZONE BEVERAGE COOLER STORAGE COMPARTMENT The Chill Zone Beverage Cooler Storage Compartment can keep chilled beverages cool depending on ambient temperature and cli mate control setting Chill Zone is intended for nonperishable beverages only The Chill Zone compartment is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel above the glove compartment The beverage retainer inside the cooler is designed to hold up to two 12 oz 0 35L cans when placed horizontally in the retainer The beverage retainer is remov able to allow for storage of other items in the compartment when not in use as a beverage cooler ce do _ oe m Maec Beverage Cooler Storage Compartment Press an
6. 16 Remote Sound System Radio CONICS zuo Rom eae ae Base 146 Repeater Lights Side 253 Replacement Bulbs 250 Replacement Keys 0 14 Replacement Parts 228 Replacement Tires 185 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 124 135 Restant Head se eas ca dee we ae 84 Restraints Child 41 Restraints Occupant 25 Retractable Cargo Area Cover 111 Reverse LightS s sss em me 253 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 219 Roof Rack Luggage Rack 114 Rotation T res uos uox rr de y 186 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 52 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 52 Safety Exhaust Gas 25 51 Safety TIPS s es eR x 50 Schedule Maintenance 260 261 272 282 313 Seat Belt Maintenance 246 Seat Belt Reminder 32 Seat Belts 25 26 52 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ess 29 And Pregnant Women 32 Child Restraint 41 42 44 49 Front Seat 26 27 Inspection e eux x xy En bs 52 Operating Instructions 27 Pretensioners oo siisi a e sm 30 Rear Seat o a aaa 26 Reminder ak ag edo ta 123 Untwisting Procedure 29 Rc NTC 81 Adjustment 00 81 Child Booster 43 Easy Entty os koi las ala aad 89 Heated xm cis us 85 Height Adjustment 83 84 Lumbar Support 82 POWBE ita ce tian deles
7. 198 GVWR Susie tesi ee EE SS 198 Hands Free Phone uconnect 61 140 141 Hard Drive HDD 140 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water 171 Hazard Warning Flasher 211 Head Restraints 84 Headlight Washers 310 Headlights 4 dus cl Res 92 Bulb Replacement 251 Cleaning mem ent Ree 245 Delay lt lt nico a mater rs 93 HighBeam ix s xe RR Rx 251 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 94 Leveling o 93 Lights On Reminder 93 PASSING iu ue e He Sev POE e 94 SWITCH tus tese Rat selbe de o 92 Time Delay aee RS S 93 WashemS scu ko wa 98 Heated Mirrors llle 61 Heated Seats 85 Heater uou i se do ah de e P RE 147 High Beam Indicator 123 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer SWITCH 2 a dh cse m Sy a Ge p en fes 94 Hill Start Assist 2 sss 180 Holder Coin 0 107 Holder Cup p s zm shear a ake bles 105 Hood Release lt vito su sb 91 A E der Sok Gat 13 Key d oed dats ph MS eM a 12 18 Ignition Key Removal 13 lluminated Entry iss 15 mmobilizer Sentry Key 13 ndicator Traction Control 127 nfant Restraint 41 42 nflation Pressure Tires 126 nformation Center Vehicle 133 nside Rearview Mirror 59 nstrument Cluster 121 122 nstru
8. SWITZERLAND Chrysler Switzerland GmbH Bernstrasse 55 CH 8952 Schlieren Tel e German 0800 80 29 20 e French 0800 80 29 21 e Italian 0800 80 29 22 Telefax 41 0 44 755 64 00 TAIWAN Chrysler Taiwan Co LTD 13th Floor Union Enterprise Plaza 1109 Min Sheng East Road Section 3 Taipei Taiwan R O C Tel 080081581 Fax 886225471871 TURKEY Chrysler Jeep Tic A S TEM Otoyolu Hadimkoy Cikisi 34900 Buyukcekmece Istanbul Tel 90 212 867 40 00 Fax 90 212 867 44 63 UKRAINE JSC AutoCapital Velyka Vasylkivska str 15 01004 Kyiv Tel 38 044 206 8888 Fax 38 044 206 8889 UNITED KINGDOM Chrysler UK Ltd Tongwell Milton Keynes MK15 8BA Tel 01908 301090 Fax 01908 301203 URUGUAY Malunix S A Miguelete 2276 Montevideo Uruguay Tel 598 2 401 7818 Fax 598 2 402 2666 VENEZUELA Chrysler de Venezuela LLC Avenida Pancho Pepe Croquer Zona Industrial Norte Valencia Estado Caraboro Tel 58 241 613 2400 Fax 58 241 613 2538 Fax 58 241 6132602 58 241 6132438 PO BOX 1960 Services And Parts Zona Industrial Il Av Norte Sur 5 C C Calle Este Oeste C C LD Center Local B 2 Valencia Estado Carabobo Telf 58 241 6132757 58 241 6132773 Fax 58 241 6132743 301 CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP NOTIFICATION MODEL REGISTRATION OR LICENSE NUMBER wi me me AL AE A A EA de op or tj NEW OWNER S NAME NEW OWNER S
9. OWNER REGISTRATION CERTIFICATE Selling Dealer OWNER Stamp ADDRESS Selling Dealer Signature vnl METAM NI Telephone Number Private Make Business Model have provided and explained the following Day pare oF Ree LL JL 1 LL Registration No or License No OPERATING MANUAL Vehicle Handbook VEHICLE PRE DELIVERY INSPECTION CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DEALER SIGNATURE TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 INTRODUCTION 2d aia id ir a repas 3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 0 0 0c e cece cece e cece eee e eee nnns 9 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE lisse cece tenet nnn 53 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL leen hn nnns 117 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 0 cecccececececececuceceececececucuraeeesesurereraes 157 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES n on annann anann nannan nanon nrnna A KA WR EREMAEAT 209 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE rexit tke A e i e er ds 223 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 1i cyezzs ee R3 a da e ex we RR RR E a 259 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 3 4 dac da uae hace irure a nae eet ale eae atte RU Russ a edie Da UR mre a me 293 10 INDEX ariyan pL 305 INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it repre sents precision workmanship distinctive styl ing and high quality all esse
10. WARNING Do not remove the A C air filter while the blower is operating or personal injury may result The A C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove box Perform the following steps to replace the filter 1 Open the glove box and remove all con tents 2 Push the retaining tab on each side of the glove box inward while gently pulling the glove box door outward until both tabs clear the door opening in the instrument panel Glove Box Removal 3 Pivot the glove box downward 4 Disengage the two retaining tabs that se cure the filter cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover A C Air Filter Replacement 5 Remove the A C air filter by pulling it straight out of the housing 6 Install the A C air filter with the arrow on the filter pointing toward the floor When installing the filter cover make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the cover 233 CAUTION The A C air filter is labeled with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter Failure to install the filter properly will result in the need to replace it more often 7 Reinstall the glove box door Make sure that the hinges are seated fully as you raise the door Otherwise the door latch will not align properly Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges sh
11. Calle 50 Final Edificio 68 San Francisco Panam Panam Tel 507 303 1100 Fax 507 303 0980 PARAGUAY Cencar S A Avda Mariscal Lopez No 5700 Asuncion Paraguay Tel 59521515911 Fax 59521515924 299 PERU Divemotor S A Calle Alejandro Bussalleu 151 Urb Sta Cat alina La Victoria Lima Peru Tel 51 1 712 2000 Fax 51 1 712 2002 POLAND Chrysler Polska Sp z 0 0 ul Gotlieba Daimlera 1 02 480 Warszawa Tel 801 330 300 PORTUGAL Chrysler Portugal S A Qta da Fonte Edif D Am lia Rua Victor C mara 2 19A 2770 229 Pago de Arcos Portugal Tel 351 0 21 323 91 00 Fax 4351 0 21 323 91 99 300 PUERTO RICO AND U S VIRGIN ISLANDS Chrysler International Services S A P O Box 191857 San Juan 009191857 Tel 7877825757 Fax 7877823345 ROMANIA S C Auto Rom S R L Bucuresti Bd Expozitiei nr 2 RO 78334 Tel 01 2240020 25 Fax 01 2241638 RUSSIA Chrysler RUS SAO 39A Leningradsky prospect 125167 Moscow Tel 7 495 745 2600 Fax 7 495 745 2601 SLOVENIA Chrysler Jeep Import d d Leskoskova 2 1122 Ljubljana Tel 01 5843 138 Fax 01 5843 222 SPAIN Chrysler Espafia S L Dpto De Atenci n al Cliente Chrysler Jeep y Dodge Apdo De Correos 24 19200 Azuqueca de Henares Guadalajara Tel 902 888 782 Fax 913 496 529 SWEDEN Chrysler Sverige Bronsyxegatan 14 Box 50530 S 202 50 Malm Tel 46 0 8 752 9858 Fax 46 0 8 752 6483
12. 22 to 36 kg 1 X X X X X X Key of letters used in the table above applicable mass group the car manufacturer IUF Suitable for ISOFIX forward child re 1 For the CRS which do not carry the shall indicate the vehicle specific ISOFIX child straints systems of universal category ap SO XX size class identification A to G for the restraint system s recommended for each po proved for use in the mass group sition 47 IL Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems CRS given in the attached list These ISOFIX CRS are those of the specific vehicle restricted or semi universal catagories X ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this mass group and or this size class Seats in front of child restraint seats may need to be adjusted forward to install the child restraint seat No access to 3rd row seating positions if Carrycot is installed in vehicle Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to follow the manufacturer s direc tions carefully when installing your child re straint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that are pro vided with the child restraint system NOTE When installing a child restraint if it inter feres with the Head Restraint recline the seatback slightly to remove the interference 48 The lower anchorages a
13. There is additional storage under the center console armrest Pull upward on the release lever located on the front of the lid Center Console Storage Bin NOTE The sliding armrest if equipped must be in the rearward position to access the release button on the front of the bin door Flip n Stow Front Passenger Seat Storage If Equipped The seat latch release loop is located in the center of the seat cushion between the seat cushion and the seatback Pull the loop upward to release the latch and then forward to open the seat to the detent position Front Passenger Seat Storage Compartment NOTE Make sure that objects inside the bin do not interfere with the latch before closing the seat Push the seat cushion downward after closing it to make sure it latches to the base 107 WARNING Be certain that the seat cushion is locked securely into position before using the seat Otherwise the seat will not provide the proper stability for passengers An improperly latched seat cushion could cause serious injury Second Row Passenger Seat Temporary Storage Bin This is a temporary storage bin designed for use when the seatback armrest is down Be sure to remove all items from this bin before raising the seatback armrest Armrest Cubby Bin 108 Second Row Map Pocket and Grocery Retainers If Equipped A map storage pocket and grocery retainers are located on the back of the drivers seatback
14. does not come on when the igni tion switch is turned to the ON position have the light repaired as soon as possible If both the Brake System Warning Light and the ABS Light remain on the ABS and Elec tronic Brake Force Distribution EBD systems are not functioning Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS comple ments the ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence do not pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deacti vated 177 WARNING The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from ex cessive speed in turns driving on very slip pery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent acci dents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle mu
15. phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Compatible Phones The uconnect phone requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile version 1 0 or higher See uconnect website for supported phones e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect To find the list of compatible phones navigate through the following menus e Select model year for the vehicle e Select type of the vehicle e Mark the box if radio is equipped with Navi gation e In the getting started tab select compatible phones Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the uconnect phone and to navigate through the uconnect phone menu structure Voice com mands are required after most uconnect phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt e For certain operations compound com mands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing e For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice com mand is given You can also break the com mands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice command
16. 3 Pull the spare tire out from underneath the vehicle and raise it upright so the tire s tread is on the ground 4 Tilt the retainer at the end of the winch cable and remove it from the center of the wheel Tire Reta er 213 Spare Tire Stowage NOTE On Seven Passenger Models fold the third row passenger seats flat This will provide more space when accessing the jacking tools and when operating the winch mecha nism 1 Remove the jack handle components 1 2 and 3 from storage and assemble them Lowering Raising Spare Tire NOTE Assemble components 2 and 3 by seating the small ball at the end of component 2 in 214 the small hole at the end of component 3 This will lock these components together Assemble components 1 and 2 so that the wheel nut socket at the end of component 1 faces upward when seated on component 2 This will make it easier to rotate the assem bly when operating the winch mechanism 2 Fit the assembled jack handle over the winch drive nut located in the jack storage area Rotate the jack handle assembly counter clockwise until there is enough cable slack to allow you to pull the cable and retainer out from underneath the vehicle CAUTION The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack handle only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and it can damage the winch 3 Place the spare tire near to the winch cable Hold the spare up
17. 7 Washer Adding Fluid 235 Washers Headlight 98 Washers Windshield 96 97 235 Washing Vehicle 243 Water Driving Through 171 Wheel and Wheel Trim 244 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 244 Wheel Nut Torque 217 Wind Buffeting 24 103 Window Fogging 155 WINDOWS suu eee x RUE ne ees 22 POWET sut xx x be od Bad pii 22 Windows Express Down 17 Windshield Defroster 52 Windshield Washers 96 97 PWG 4 os um A eR Reds 235 Windshield Wiper Blades 234 Windshield Wipers 96 Wiper Blade Replacement 234 Wiper Delay 97 Wiper Rear s scies Rees 112 Wipers Intermittent 97 Wrecker Towing o cucu caia nenga 221
18. Front Passengers Airbag 3 Knee Bolsters NOTE These airbags are certified to the new regu lations for Advanced Airbags The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags they are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG This vehicle may also be equipped with Supple mental Side Seat Airbags If the vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Seat Airbags they are marked with an airbag label sewn into the outboard side of the seat NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment Airbag System Components The airbag system consists of the following e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Airbag Warning Light e Driver Front Airbag e Front Passenger Airbag e Supplemental Rear Impact Active Head Re straint for Driver and Front Passenger e Front and Side Impact Sensors e Steering Wheel and Column e Instrument Panel e Knee Impact Bolster e Front Seat Belt Pretensioners if equipped e Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Cur ains SABIC if equipped e Supplemental Side Seat Ai
19. 160 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same coolant throughout the life of your vehicle Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will re quire more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap All Engines The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant and to ensure that coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution Never add coolant when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Continued WARNING Continued e Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or engine damage may result Disposal of Used Coolant All Engines Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant i
20. 4 Rotate the applicable bulb s electrical con nector Ya turn counterclockwise and remove it from the taillamp housing 254 81dd40b0 1 Tail Stop Lamp Bulb 2 Rear Turn Signal Lamp Bulb 5 Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install the replacement bulb 6 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the taillamp housing and rotate the connector Ya turn clockwise to lock it in place 7 Reinstall the taillamp housing and fasteners Changing the Tail Lamp or Backup Lamp 1 Open the liftgate 2 Remove the two fasteners retaining the tail lamp housing to the liftgate from the inboard face of the liftgate 3 Carefully insert a trim stick plastic flat blade tool between the taillamp housing and the liftgate Use the trim stick and hand pressure together to disengage the taillamp housing from the liftgate 4 Rotate the applicable bulb s electrical con nector Ya turn counterclockwise and remove it from the housing 81dd40b7 1 Tail Lamp Bulb 2 Backup Lamp Bulb 5 Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install the replacement bulb 6 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the housing and rotate the connector Ya turn clockwise to lock it in place 7 Reinstall the taillamp housing and fasteners License Plate Lamp 1 Push the small locking tab sticking out of the end of the lens toward the side of the vehicle and hold it in that position 81dd4
21. 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter t 1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 277 90 000 Miles 144 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Inspect and replace the PCV valve if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals and replace if necessary Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes OOOO CO C O C Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 97 500 Miles 156 000 km or 78 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 278 105 000 Miles 168 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule O O C Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tf Rotate tires If using your vehicle in dust
22. 98 TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED This feature allows you to tilt the steering col umn upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column Tilt Telescoping Steering Control Handle To unlock the steering column push the control handle downward To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position pull the control handle up ward until fully engaged WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driv ing Adjusting the steering column while driv ing or driving with the steering column un locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your vehicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL When engaged the Electronic Speed Contro takes over the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the right side of the steering wheel CRUISE on OFF Y SET DeceEL 81bc4c2c Electronic Speed Control Lever NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Electronic Speed Control System has
23. H1 High Beam Headlamp HB3 9005 Front Turn Signal PY27W 3757AK Front PositionLamp W5W FrontFogLamp PSX24W Rear Fog Lamp PS 19W BV Side Repeater Lamp WY5W Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Rear Tai Stop 3157K Rear Turn Signal 3757A Rear Tall ocak tae edes 3157K Backup Lamp 3157K License Lamp 168 BULB REPLACEMENT Low Beam High Beam Front Turn Signal and Front Position Lamp 1 Open the hood NOTE It may be necessary to remove the air cleaner filter housing and position the To tally Integrated Power Module TIPM aside to replace certain lamps in the left headlamp housing 2 Rotate the applicable bulb and connector assembly 1 4 turn counterclockwise and remove the assembly from the headlamp housing d 1 Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb 2 Low Beam Headlamp Bulb 3 Front Position Bulb 4 High Beam Headlamp Bulb 81ea616d 3 Disconnect the bulb from the harness con nector and then connect the replacement bulb 251 CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 4 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the headlamp housing and rotate it 1 4 turn clockwise to
24. Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 284 40 000 Miles 60 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a a a OOC CO C Change the engine oil and engine oil filter f Rotate tires If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Inspect accessory drive belt replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals and replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 50 000 Miles 75 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary 1 Change manual transaxle fluid Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 285 60 000 Miles 90 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule OOOO OO C O C C O Change the engine oil and engine oil filter f Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the fuel filter Inspec
25. Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the uconnect phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speak ing to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The uconnect phone will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the uconnect phone from idle sim ply press the amp button and follow the audible prompts for directions All uconnect phone sessions begin with a press of the to button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link uconnect phone to a Cellular Phone To begin using your uconnect phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone refer to Compatible Phones section to learn about the phone type To complete the pairing process you will need to reference your cellular phone owner s manual The uconnect website may also pro vide detailed instructions for pairing The following are general phone to uconnect phone pairing instructions e Press t
26. Prior to folding the third row passenger seat make sure the second row passenger seat is not in a reclined position This will allow the seat to fold easily To Fold the Seat Pull the latch release loop located at the top of the seatback upward push the seat forward slightly and release the release loop Then continue to push the seat forward The head restraints will fold automatically as the seat moves forward Seatback Release To Unfold the Seat Grasp the assist strap loop on the seatback and pull it toward you to raise the seatback Continue to raise the seatback until it locks in place Then raise the head restraint to lock it in place Assist Strap The seatback can also be locked in a reclined position To do so pull the latch release loop located at the top of the seatback upward allow the seatback to recline and release the release loop WARNING Be certain that the seatback is locked se curely into position Otherwise the seat will not provide the proper stability for passen gers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury e Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat without having the head restraint unfolded and locked in place Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury to the passenger in the event of an accident e Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat with the second row seatback s folded flat In a collision the passenger could sli
27. Set the Fan control to the high position Press the 4 button VERY HOT Set the Mode control at or between to full cool After the hot air is pushed from the vehicle press the s and 4 button to turn recirculate off Set the temperature control C x5 button to turn recirculate on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable press the Press the CE If it s sunny set it s cloudy COOL OR COLD Press the 84 6 65668 T p the air con E HUMID CONDITIONS If it s sunny set conditioning on gi and COLD DRY Set the Mode control at or near 3 CONDITIONS this case set the Mode control at or between 4 GA 156 button to turn recirculate off the Mode control at or near 4 gt button to turn recirculate off and adjust the temperature control for comfort and turn the air conditioning on If or dark set the Mode control at or near button to turn recirculate off the Mode control at or between and then turn the air If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near J and turn ditioning on If the windows begin to fog set Mode control at or between Sp If it is sunny you may want more upper air In and 74 In very cold weather if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode c
28. To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ENGLISH or METRIC appears 140 NAV TURN BY TURN If Equipped When ON is selected the Turn by Turn direc tions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a pro grammed route To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears COMPASS VARIANCE Refer to Compass Variance under Compass Display CALIBRATE COMPASS Refer to Manual Compass Calibration under Compass Display SOUND SYSTEMS Refer to your Sound Systems Booklet SALES CODE REX MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The REX Multimedia system contains a radio navigation system six disc CD DVD player USB port 30 gigabyte hard drive HDD and the uconnect Hands Free Bluetooth cellular system A 7 in 17 8 cm remote screen allows easy menu selection while the Advanced Voice Dia log System recognizes more than 1 000 words for audio navigation entertainment and hands free mobile phone use The satellite navigation capability combines a Global Positioning System GPS based navi gation system with a remote color screen to provide maps turn identification selection menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destinations and routes A shared HDD for the navigation system the
29. area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Continued WARNING Continued Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly On seven passenger models do not drive the vehicle with the second row passenger seat in the easy entry exit position seat cushion flipped upward and seat moved forward as this position is only intended for entering and exiting the third row seats Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury On seven passenger models do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat with the second row seatback s folded flat Ina collision the passenger could slide under neath the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Exhaust Gas WARNING e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They con tain carbon monoxide CO which is color less and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poi son you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into
30. at a time The uconnect phone is available in English Dutch French German Italian or Spanish languages as equipped WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death 62 Phone Button The rearview mirror contains the 0 microphone for the uconnect phone depending on the type of mirror and radio equipped and the radio contains the two control buttons that will enable you to ac cess the uconnect phone Voice Recognition Button e Actual button location may vary with radio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The uconnect phone can be used with Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phones Some phones may not support all the uconnect phone features If your cellular phone supports a different profile e g Head set Profile you may not be able to use any uconnect phone features Refer to your cel lular service provider or the phone manufac turer for details The uconnect phone is fully integrated with the vehicle s audio system The volume of the uconnect phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the uconnect
31. database and other radio features allows up loads of music and photos from CDs or through the USB port The Gracenote database finds the artist track and title for the music An auxiliary input jack permits passengers to listen to a portable MP3 player through the vehicle s speakers For vehicles equipped with the Video Entertainment System VES sepa rate audio outputs allow passengers to listen to the vehicle speakers while different audio tracks play through the system s wireless head phones This means rear seat passengers can watch a DVD on the optional rear seat enter tainment system while the driver and front seat passenger listen to the radio Other special features include music type se lections traffic messaging optional easy store presets parental lockout for VES if equipped and a backup camera display for vehicles equipped with a backup camera Re fer to your Navigation User s Manual for de tailed operating instructions Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Clock Setting Procedure The GPS receiver in this system is synchro nized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites The satellites clock is Green wich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the system s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is
32. e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel cap is re moved or the tank filled e Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running e Afire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message f the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged the word gASCAP will display in the odometer If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap until a clicking sound is heard and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System OBD Il in Section 7 VEHICLE LOADING The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the Vehicle Certification Label This information should be used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the driver s door The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer e Month and year of manufacture e Gross Vehi
33. ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality available on the ve hicle can be any one of three types e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the uconnect phone either until the call ends or until a vehicle specific time expires or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the uconnect phone and transfer of the call to the cellular phone e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the uconnect phone for a certain duration after which the call is auto matically transferred from the uconnect phone to the cellular phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the cellular phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF uconnect phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the uconnect phone is using e Press the to button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Dutch French German Italian or Spanish if so equipped Continue to follow the system prompts to complete language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every uconnect phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phonebook is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages F
34. intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale light after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re placement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may re sult when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor dam age Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result Refer to Tire Inflation Pressures un der Tires General Information and to Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS in Sec tion 5 for more information 22 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ABS The light wil turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four sec onds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that s
35. pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pres sure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale light illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approxi mately one minute and then remain continu ously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
36. the engine is ready to start 164 3 DO NOT press the accelerator Turn the ignition switch to the START position and re lease when the engine starts NOTE The starter motor may need to remain en gaged for up to 30 seconds in very cold conditions until the engine is started 4 After the engine starts allow it to idle for approximately 30 seconds before driving This allows oil to circulate and lubricate the turbo charger WARNING NEVER pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury e Running a cold engine at high speeds dur ing driving or idling may damage engine components Before turning off your turbo diesel en gine always allow the engine to return to normal idle speed and run for several seconds This assures proper lubrication of the turbocharger This is particularly necessary after any period of hard driv ing Turbocharger Cool Down NOTE Letting the engine idle after extended opera tion allows the turbine housing to cool to normal operating temperature The following chart should be used as a guide in determining the amount of engine idle time required to sufficiently cool down the turbo charger before shut down depending upon the type of driving and the amount of cargo Turbocharger Cool Down Chart Driving Conditions Loa
37. tion symbol will illuminate in the display when this button is selected Push the button a sec ond time to turn off the RECIRCULATION mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle NOTE In cold weather use of the RECIRCULATION mode may lead to excessive window fog ging The RECIRCULATION mode is not al lowed in the FLOOR MIX and DEFROST modes to improve window clearing opera tion Recirculation will be disabled automati cally if these modes are selected Rear Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped The Rear ATC System has floor air outlets at the rear of the right side sliding door and overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position The system provides heated air through the floor outlets or cool dehumidified air through the headliner outlets The Three Zone ATC Climate control for the Rear ATC System is on the front lower ATC panel located on the instrument panel Pressing the REAR LOCK button for the Rear ATC System from the Three Zone ATC Climate control illuminates a LOCK symbol in the rear display The rear temperature and air source are controlled from the Three Zone ATC Cli mate control Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC control when the REAR LOCK button is turned off The Three Zone ATC Climate control is located in the headliner near the center of the vehicle 045607740 Rear Zone ATC 4 Rear MODE
38. which is not resolved to your satisfaction discuss the matter with your deal er s management Your authorized dealer will be happy to assist you with any questions about your vehicle IMPORTANT NOTICE ALL MATERIAL CONTAINED IN THIS PUBLI CATION IS BASED ON THE LATEST INFORMA TION AVAILABLE AT TIME OF PUBLICATION APPROVAL THE RIGHT IS RESERVED TO PUBLISH REVISIONS AT ANY TIME This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering spe cialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle It is supple mented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Fol lowing the instructions and recommendations in this Owner s Manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle After you have read the Owner s Manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold The manufacturer reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or to make additions to or improvements in its products without imposing any obligations upon itself to install them on products previ ously manufactured The Owner s Manual illustrates and describes the features that are standard or available as extra cost options Therefore some of the equipment and accessories in this publication may not appear on your vehicle NOTE Be s
39. you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield VIN Location The stamped VIN is located on the right front door sill under the sill moulding Stamped VIN Location VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death 10 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Key Fob and a Wireless Ignition Node WIN with integral igni tion switch You can insert the double sided integrated key into the ignition switch with either side up Wireless Ignition Node WIN The Wireless Ignition Node WIN operates similarly to an ignition switch It has four oper ating positions three of which are detented and one spring loaded The detented positions are LOCK ACC and ON The START position is a spring loaded momentary contact position When released from the START position the switch automatically returns to the detented ON position Wireless Ignition Node WIN 1 LOCK 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON 4 START Key Fob The Key Fob operates the ignition switch It also contain
40. you must reset the head restraint on the drivers and front passenger seat You can recognize when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they have moved forward as shown in step three of the resetting procedure 1 Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat 022607492 Hand Positioning Points On AHR 2 Position the hands on the top of the de ployed AHR at a comfortable position 3 Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism 1 4 022607497 1 Downward Movement 2 Rearward Movement 31 i 022607787 3 Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism 4 The ARR front soft foam and trim half should lock into the back decorative plastic half 022607494 AHR In Reset Position 32 NOTE e If you have difficulties or problems reset ting the head restraints see an authorized dealer e For safety reasons have the Active Head Restraints checked by a qualified special ist at an authorized dealer Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle the seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the BeltAlert will continue
41. 5 REAR LOCK 1 AUTO 2 Blower Speed 3 Rear Temperature The Rear Zone ATC for the rear passengers is in the overhead console above the second row passenger seats 1 Press the REAR LOCK button on the front lower ATC panel This turns off the REAR LOCK icon in the rear temperature knob 2 Rotate the Rear Blower Rear Temperature and the Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs 3 ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob counterclockwise to AUTO Once the desired temperature is displayed the ATC System will automatically achieve and maintain that comfort level When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the sys tem to function automatically NOTE e It is not necessary to move the tempera ture settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the tem perature mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible 153 e The temperature can be displayed in En glish or Metric units by selecting the Dis play Units of Measure in customer programmable feature Refer to the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Fea tures in this Section Rear Blower Control The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off or any fixed blower speed by rotating the knob from low to high This allows the rear
42. Dial 64 e The system will prompt you to say the num ber you want to call e For example you can say 151 1234 5555 e The uconnect phone will confirm the phone number and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call by Saying a Name e Press the o button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call e The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the uconnect phonebook or down loaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your uconnect Phonebook e The uconnect phone will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone num ber which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your uconnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the uconnect phone book is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the to button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and it is recommended For ex ample say Robert Smith or Robert in stead of Bob e When prompted enter the number designa tion e g Home
43. Engine Coolant Reservoir 2 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 3 Engine Oil Fill 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 5 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 6 Remote Jump Start Negative Battery Post 070307227 7 Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM 8 Automatic Transaxle Dipstick 9 Washer Fluid Reservoir 10 Coolant Pressure Cap 11 Engine Oil Dipstick 225 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 7L 1 Engine Coolant Reservoir 2 Coolant Pressure Cap 3 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 4 Engine Oil Fill 5 Engine Oil Dipstick 6 Automatic Transaxle Dipstick If Equipped 070507760 7 Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 9 Remote Jump Start Negative Battery Post 10 Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM 11 Air Cleaner Filter 12 Washer Fluid Reservoir 226 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 0L DIESEL 1 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 2 Engine Oil Fill 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 4 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 5 Remote Jump Start Negative Battery Post 070107756 6 Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM 7 Air Cleaner Filter 8 Washer Fluid Reservoir 9 Engine Oil Dipstick 10 Engine Coolant Reservoir 227 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II This System monitors the perf
44. Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 257 Fog Light Service 252 Fogi LIGNIS s et ms 92 94 123 252 Fog Lights Rear 130 252 Folding Front Passenger Seat 83 Folding Rear Seat 90 86 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 219 FUG 4a Bia ae ra eed 192 196 AGING uses uu we See Bok a 196 Additives 0 193 Conservilg exem 135 Diesel hg se monk po ded 196 257 Ethanol uius m RERO x G 193 Filler Cap Gas Cap 196 Gasoline e zo os aem doe Res 192 GAUGE uec eb ace E 122 Octane Rating 192 257 Requirements 192 Saver Mode 135 Specifications 257 Tank Capacity 256 Fuel Flexible See Flexible Fuel Vehicles RUSINO js ca be ss moite a ee a 196 BUSES exito wo Ae Rok S eRe 246 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 196 228 Gas Gauge Fuel Gauge 122 Gasoline Clean Air 193 Gasoline Fuel 192 Conserving 135 Gauges Coolant Temperature 122 FUG isos dee xum ee 122 Odometer 124 Speedometer 123 Tachometer o s caco eee 123 GearRanges 168 Gearshitt se ees aoe ee Ed 168 General Information 14 18 170 192 General Maintenance 228 Glass Cleaning 245 Glow Plug Light 130 Gross Axle Weight Rating 198 199 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
45. NOTE At any time you can say the words Can cel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active applica tion For example if you are in the disc menu and you are listening to FM radio you can speak commands from the disc menu or from the FM radio menu When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the windows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the Ws button and say Help or Main Menu Commands The Voice Recognition VR system under stands two types of commands Universal com mands are available at all times Local com mands are available if the supported radio mode is active Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the e button 2 Say a command e g Help 79 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Recognition VR system is speaking Please note the volume setting for VR is differ ent than the audio system Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the ih button You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu In this mode you can say the followin
46. Start WARNING e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious per sonal injury Continued WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transaxle cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the cata lytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly Refer to Section 6 for proper jump starting proce dures and follow them carefully Without Tip Start f the engine fails to start after you have fol owed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather procedures it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 second intervals at one time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again If the engine is flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the key fob is released If this occurs continue crankin
47. Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle the TPMS Telltale Light will remain on and a chime will sound In addition the graphic in the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 min utes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 sec onds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 4 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the TPMS Telltale Light will turn off and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h
48. Transmission Feed cation Module Red Batt OCM M23 10 Amp Left Horn M29 10 Amp Occupant M17 15 Amp Left Park Side Red Red Classification Blue Marker Running M24 25 Amp Rear Wiper Module OCM Tail Lights License m Natural M30 15 Amp Rear Wiper Mod Lights M25 20 Amp Fuel Pump Diesel j Blue ule Module Power M18 15 Amp Right Park Side Yellow Lift Pump Folding Mirror Blue Marker Running M26 10 Amp Power MIRRORS J1962 Diag Feed Tail Lights Red Switch Drivers M31 _ 20Amp Back Up Lights M19 25 Amp Auto Shut Down Window Switch Yellow Natural ASD 1 and 2 M27 10 Amp Steering Column M32 10 Amp Occupant Restraint M20 15 Amp Electronic Vehicle Red Lock Wireless Ig Red Controller ORC Blue Information Center nition Node WIN M33 10 Amp NGC Powertrain EVIC If PEM Red Control Module Equipped Interior Lighting Steering Wheel Switches If Equipped Switch Bank Battery Feed TCM 249 Car Cav Mini eM tridge Description ity dia Fuse p M34 10 Amp Power Assist Mod Red ule HVAC Module Headlamp Wash ers Compass v Module If Equipped Flash light If Equipped RAD Fan Diesel M35 10 Amp Heated Mirrors Red If Equipped M36 20 Amp Power Outlet 3 _ Yellow Batt M37 10 Amp Anti Lock Brake Red System ABS Electronic Stability v Program ESP S
49. Vanity Lamps M12 30 Amp Radio Amplifier Natural If Equipped Blue Hands Free Green AMP M6 20 Amp Power Outlet 1 Module HFM M13 20 Amp Cabin Compart Yellow Accessory ACC If Equipped Re Yellow ment Node CCN Rain Sensor mote Display If Multifunction M7 20 Amp Power Outlet 42 Equipped Satellite Switch Siren Yellow Battery or Digital Audio Re Module ITM m Accessory ACC ceiver SDARS M14 20 Amp Trailer Tow BUX Selectable If Equipped Uni Yellow If Equipped M8 20 Amp Front Heated versal Garage M15 20 Amp Auto Dim Rearview Yellow Seats Door Opener Yellow Mirror If If Equipped UGDO Equipped Infrared M9 20 Amp Rear Heated If Equipped Vanity Sensor IR Yellow Seats If Light Video If Equipped Multi Equipped Entertainment _ function Switch System VES Tire Pressure If Equipped Monitor System M11 10 Amp Automatic TPMS If Red Temperature Equipped Transfer Control ATC Case Module If Equipped If Equipped Car Car m Car m p A madga s Description T tridge eui Description n tridge eril Description use Fuse Fuse M16 10 Amp Occupant Restraint M21 20 Amp Auto Shut Down M28 10 Amp NGC Powertrain Red Controller ORC Yellow ASD 3 Red Control Module Occupant Classifi M22 10 Amp Right Horn Lad
50. Work Cellular or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if de sired e When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The uconnect phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a sepa rate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone uconnect phone automatically downloads cellular phone s phonebook Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook transfer from Cellular Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone uconnect phone automatically down loads names text names and number entries from the cellular phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See uconnect website for supported phones To call a name from downloaded or uconnect Phonebook follow the proce dure in Call by Saying a Name section Automatic download and update if sup ported begins as soon as the phone Bluetooth wireless connection is made to the uconnect phone For example after you start the vehicle Maximum of 1000 entries per
51. Your Engine Overheats in Sec tion 6 for more information NOTE As the coolant temperature gauge ap proaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound Further over heating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H In this case the indicator light will flash continuously and a continuous chime will sound until the engine is allowed to cool CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could dam age your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H safely pull over and stop the ve hicle Idle the vehicle with the A C turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine OFF immediately and call for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself refer to Section 7 and follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 5 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the FO front fog lights are on Refer to Fog Lights under Lights in Section 3 for more information 6 Low Fuel Warning Light This indicator lights when the fuel level drops to approximately one eighth tank Refer to Adding Fuel in Section 5 for more informa
52. allows for up to a 20 000 mile 30 000 km service interval for engine oil and filter changes when your vehicle is serviced by your autho rized dealer 291 292 294 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer distributors are vitally inter ested in your satisfaction with their products and services If a servicing problem or other difficulty should occur we recommend that you take the following steps Discuss the problem at the authorized dealer with the dealer principal or the service man ager Management personnel at the authorized dealer are in the best position to resolve the problem quickly When you contact the distributor please provide all of the following information e Your name address and phone number e Vehicle Identification Number this 17 digit number is found on an etched plate or label located on the left front corner of the instru ment panel visible through the windshield It is also available from your vehicle registra tion or title Selling and servicing authorized dealer Vehicle s delivery date and current odometer distance 296 e Service history of your vehicle e An accurate description of the problem and the conditions under which it occurs ARGENTINA Chrysler Argentina S A Boulevard Azucena Villaflor 435 C1107Cll Buenos Aires Argentina Tel 54 11 4891 7900 Fax 54 11 4891 7901 AUSTRALIA Chrysler Australia Pacific Pty Ltd ACN 004 411 410 Chrysler Vehi
53. and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly cor rosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to air borne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and underbody protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or re moval of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar e Salt in the air near seacoast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR Car 243 Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e f insects tar or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film
54. avoid damaging the blade Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gaso line etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies de pending on geographical area and fre quency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks wa ter lines or wet spots If any condition is present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid cloth removing any de bris that may be affecting its function Rear Wiper Removal Installation If Equipped 1 Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward this will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the liftgate glass m Li y 1 Wiper Arm 2 Pivot Cap NOTE The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully upward unless the pivot cap is raised first 2 Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade off of the liftgate glass 3 Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper blade holder 972607742 1 Wiper Blade 2 Blade Pivot Pin 3 Wiper Arm 4 Wiper Blade Holder 4 Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade holder at the end of the wiper arm and firmly press the wiper blade until it snaps into place 5 Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into place Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer and the rear window washer share the same fluid reservoir The fluid reservoir is located
55. been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated simulta neously If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by push ing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push and release the ON OFF button located on the end of the speed control lever The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push and release the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off Be sure to turn the system off when it is not in use NOTE The Electronic Speed Control System will automatically turn off when the engine is turned OFF WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the sys tem off when you are not using it To Set a Desired Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired press downward on the lever to SET DECEL and release Release the accelerator pedal and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE e The vehicle must be traveling at least 25 mph 40 km h for the speed control to set e The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the lever to SET DECEL To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal or
56. by adjusting the driver front passenger and rear seat rotary tempera ture knobs Once the desired temperature is displayed the system will achieve and auto matically maintain that comfort level 3 When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function auto matically NOTE e It is not necessary to move the tempera ture settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the tem perature mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible e The temperature can be displayed in En glish or Metric units by selecting the Dis play Units of Measure in customer programmable feature Refer to the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Fea tures in this Section To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain on low and the DELAY symbol will appear in the front ATC display until the engine warms up The fan will engage immediately if the DEFROST mode is selected or by pressing the Front Upper ATC Panel blower rocker button and setting the fan to any fixed blower speed Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will be turned off when the system is being used in the manual mode NOTE Ea
57. call can be placed on hold at one time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the 4 button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the iS but ton while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Mak ing a Second Call While Current Call in Progress After the second call has estab lished press and hold the o button until you 68 hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the phone far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the to button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the to button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The uconnect phone will call the last num ber that was dialed from your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the uconnect phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the uconnect phone after the vehicle
58. check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the dipstick Adding 1 0 qt 1 0 I of oil when the reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these engines 229 Change Engine Oil Gasoline Engines Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Sec tion 8 for the proper maintenance intervals NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 7 500 miles 12 000 km or six months whichever comes first Change Engine Oil 2 0L Diesel Engine The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for sched uled maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for information on this system NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 20 000 miles 30 000 km or 2 years whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection Gasoline Engines Non ACEA Categories For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the require ments of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 230 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol mean
59. custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash data bases such as those maintained by the gov ernment officials and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver vehicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler Group LLC product 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law Data parameters that are recorded e Diagnostic trouble code s and warning light status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system Vehicle speed Engine RPM Brake switch status Pedal position And other parameters depending on vehicle configuration Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children
60. demone RRR 169 Selection of Lubricant 243 258 Transmission See Transaxle Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 17 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry 16 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry li C 16 Transporting Pets 50 Tread Wear Indicators 185 Trip Computer iss 130 Trip Odometer 124 Trip Odometer Reset Button 126 129 Turbo Cool Down 164 Turn Signals 92 94 123 253 UCI Connector 143 uconnect Hands Free Phone 61 140 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector oem ee E 143 Universal Serial Bus USB Port 140 Unleaded Gasoline 192 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 29 Upholstery Care 245 WSB POM zog morem me Rx 140 Vanity Mirors eene 61 Variance Compass 131 137 Vehicle Certification Label 197 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 7 316 Vehicle Loading 197 198 Vehicle Modifications Alterations T Vehicle Storage 155 250 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 15 Video Entertainment System Rear Seat Video System 143 Viscosity Engine Oil 230 231 Voice Recognition System VR 79 Warning Flasher Hazard 211 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 122 Warnings and Cautions
61. engine coolant antifreeze that allows ex tended maintenance intervals This coolant antifreeze can be used up to five years or 100 000 miles 160 000 km before replace ment To prevent reducing this extended main tenance period it is important that you use the same coolant throughout the life of your ve hicle e The manufacturer recommends using MO PAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent e Mix a minimum solution of 5096 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to exceed 7096 if emperatures below 34 F 37 C are an icipated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will re quire more frequent coolant changes Adding Coolant 2 0L Diesel Engine Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows ex tended maintenance intervals This coolant can be used up to five years or 100 000 miles
62. fog lights or rear defroster If the light remains on it means that the charging system is experiencing a prob lem See your local authorized dealer to obtain service immediately If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in section 6 of this manual 125 19 Cruise Indicator Light If Equipped This indicator lights when the elec CRUISE tronic speed control system is turned on Refer to Electronic Speed Control in Section 3 for more information 20 Trip Odometer Button Changing the Display Press and release this button once to change the display from odometer to Trip A Press and release it again to change the display from Trip A to Trip B Resetting the Trip Odometer Display the trip mileage that you want to reset Trip A or Trip B Then push and hold the button approximately two seconds until the display resets to 0 The odometer must be in Trip Mode to reset the trio odometer 21 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light If Equipped Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked e monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom mended by the vehicle manufac 126 turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation
63. he dyes 231 Belts Seat 26 52 Body Mechanism Lubrication 234 Booster Seat 0 43 Brake Assist System 177 Brake Assist Warning Light 128 Brake Control System Electronic 176 Brake Fluid sss ssa m 258 Brake Parking ia eum Rees 173 Brake System 175 240 Anti Lock ABS 175 176 Fluid Check 241 258 Master Cylinder 241 El dl a ea arita E 173 Warning Light 128 Brakes oi ora ae hn Sb a 175 240 Brake Transaxle Interlock 167 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle o o oo 50 Brightness Interior Lights 95 Bulb Replacement 250 251 Bulb Liglit s a teet s 52 250 Calibration Compass 133 137 Camera Rear 100 Capacities Fluid 256 Caps Filler Fuel TP a UE ay 196 Oil Engine 225 226 227 230 231 Power Steering 173 Radiator Coolant Pressure 239 Car Washes 243 Carbon Monoxide Warning 51 Cargo Area Cover 111 Cargo Area Features 110 Cargo Compartment 110 Eight utut e tex xe ders 95 110 Luggage Carrier 114 Cargo bight cade Seah wang ov iry 95 Cargo Load Flor 110 Cargo Management System 110 Rollaway Tonneau Cover 111 Tri Fold Load Floor 110 Cargo Tie Downs
64. hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size e Belts should not be worn with straps twisted Continued WARNING Continued e Care should be taken to avoid contamina tion of the webbing with polishes oils and chemicals and particularly battery acid Cleaning may be safely carried out using mild soap and water The belt should be replaced if webbing becomes frayed con taminated or damaged Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the front seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is along side the pillar near the back of your seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap Pulling Out Lap Shoulder Belt 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click a Connecting Latch Plate To Buckle 27 WARNING e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you e A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly e A belt that is
65. in Sec tion 8 for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before start ing the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended Maintenance Free Battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic maintenance required NOTE The battery is stored in a compartment that is located behind the left front fender and is 231 accessible through the wheel well The wheel and tire assemble do not need to be removed to access the compartment Re mote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump starting To access the battery turn the steering whee ully to the right and remove the access pane rom the inner fender shield WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your ey
66. in the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with wind shield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water When refilling the washer fluid reservoir apply some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean This will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer System in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal 4 I of washer fluid when the message LoWASH appears in the instrument cluster 235 WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly main tained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent technician inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or misposi tioned parts Open seams or loose conne
67. infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the ve hicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of child re straints are held in the vehicle by the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren in this section 7 m Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren in this section The belt positioning b
68. large degree rely on the phone and network and not the uconnect phone e Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e In a convertible vehicle system perfor mance may be compromised with the con vertible top down Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose con nection to the uconnect phone When this happens the connection can generally be re established by switching the phone off on Your cellular phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system Voice Tree Main Menu Breakdown English UConnect EN Espanol A E Tutorial Francais German Italian Dutch Last Enter Enter Number Name Number on Phone is redialed See Phonebook Flowchart See Setup Flowchart Number associated Number The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages with entry is Dialed is dialed Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030609126 76 Voice Tree Phonebook New Entry Enter Name Phonebook Entries Listed one Enter Name at a time 1st Confirmation Enter Location Enter Location Enter Location 2nd Confirmation
69. lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlock the doors automatically If a Deployment Occurs The airbags are designed to deflate immedi ately after deployment NOTE Front and or side airbags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean some thing is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymna sium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a nor mal by product of the process that gener ates the non toxic gas used for airbag infla tion These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you eye irritation rinse the area with have skin or cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see yo these particles settle on your clo ur doctor If hing follow the garmen
70. lock it in place Front Fog Lamp NOTE Turn the steering wheel to the right if replac ing the left front fog lamp or to the left if replacing the right front fog lamp to allow for easier access to the front of the wheel well 1 Remove the fasteners retaining the front lower wheel well access panel and remove the access panel 2 Remove the electrical connector from the fog lamp housing 252 3 Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install the replacement bulb CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 4 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the fog lamp housing and rotate the connector Ya turn clockwise to lock it in place 5 Reinstall the front lower wheel well access panel and fasteners Rear Fog Lamp 1 Reach behind the bumper above the bumper reinforcement and press the release tabs on the fog lamp housing Blea862b Release Tabs 2 Separate the fog lamp housing from the bumper fascia 3 Disconnect the electrical harness connec tor 81ea61ad Electrical Connector 4 Rotate the bulb and connector assembly 1 4 turn counterclockwise and remove it from the fog lamp housing 5 Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install the replacement bulb 6 Install the bulb and connector assembly into
71. lock up When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system performing its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing con ditions can include ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti Lock e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e The clicking sound of solenoid valves e Brake pedal pulsations and e A slight drop or fall away of the brake peda at the end of the stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS WARNING e The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to inter ference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capability Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals Continued WARNING Continued e Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will dimin ish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping dis tance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal
72. of spe cific vehicle data parameters see list below in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment if ap plicable and up to a quarter second of either high speed deceleration data or change in velocity during and or after airbag deployment or near deployment EDR data is ONLY re corded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and is otherwise unavailable NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indicative of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a complete accident investigation the elec tronic data may be used by Chrysler Group LLC and others to learn more about the pos sible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor mance In addition to crash investigations initi ated by Chrysler Group LLC such investiga tions may be requested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insurance organizations n the event that an investigation is undertaken by Chrysler Group LLC regardless of initia tive the company or its designated represen tative will first obtain permission of the appro priate
73. on the left rear bumper fascia To install the tow eye open the door using the vehicle key or a small screwdriver and thread the tow eye into the receptacle Insert the flat end of the jack handle through the eye and tighten refer to Jacking and Tire Changing in Section 6 for information The tow hook must be fully seated to the attaching bracket through the lower front fascia as shown If the tow hook is not fully seated to the attaching bracket the vehicle should not be towed Rear Tow Eye Installed TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Towing Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position Flatbed towing is the preferred towing method However if a flatbed towing vehicle is not available a wheel lift towing vehicle may be used Furthermore rear towing is not recom mended with the front wheels on the ground as transaxle damage can result If rear towing is the only alternative a front end dolly must be used Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle 221 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With The Key In The Ignition And All Four Wheels On The Ground CAUTION e Ifthe vehicle being towed requires steering the ignition switch must be in the ON posi tion not in the LOCK or ACC position e Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front with sling type towing equipment Damage to the front fa
74. only the anchors provided for child seat tethers Cargo tie downs are located on both rear trim panels These tie downs should be used to secure loads safely when the vehicle is moving Cargo Tie Downs WARNING The weight and position of cargo and passen gers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury follow these guide lines for loading your vehicle e Donot carry loads that exceed the load limits described on the label attached to the left door or left door center pillar e Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible e Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to sway e Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibil ity or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision e To help protect against personal injury pas sengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is in tended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts Retractable Cargo Area Cover If Equipped Five Passenger Models NOTE The purpose of this cover is for privacy not to secure loads It will not prevent cargo from shifting or protect passeng
75. or turn off the light manually These lights also turn on when you press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter open a door or the liftgate or turn the Dimmer Control completely upward to the second detent For models equipped with LED lighting you can swivel the lens socket to direct the light as desired Models without Overhead Console There are two courtesy reading lights mounted in the headliner between the sun visors Press and release the button next to the lens to turn on or turn off the light manually A courtesy light is also mounted in the headliner above the second row passenger seats Press and re lease the lens to turn on or turn off the light manually These lights also turn on when you press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmit ter open a door or the liftgate or turn the dimmer control completely upward to the sec ond detent Cargo Light This light is mounted in the liftgate trim panel It turns on when you press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter open a door or the liftgate or turn the dimmer control completely upward to the second detent Battery Saver Feature To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off automatically within 10 minutes of turning 95 the ignition switch to the LOCK position This will occur if the interior lights were switched ON manually or are on because a door is open WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The windshield wiper washer cont
76. order to prevent fogging when the RECIRCULATION button is pressed and the mode control is set to PANEL the A C will engage automatically The A C can be deselected manually with out disturbing the mode control selection Economy Mode If ECONOMY mode is desired press the A C button to turn off the indicator light and the A C compressor Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired temperature Air Conditioning Operation Push on this button to engage the Air Condi tioning A C A light will illuminate when the A C System is engaged NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds Max A C For maximum cooling use the A C and RECIR CULATION mode buttons at the same time 149 Two and Three Zone Automatic Temperature Control ATC Systems If Equipped e Front Two and Three Zone ATC allows both driver and front passenger seat occupant and rear seat occupants to select individual comfort settings e Occupants in the vehicle select AUTO mode operation by a button press on the right rotary knob and a comfort temperature set ting using rotary knobs on the control unit e The system can be controlled manually if desired e SYNC feature links the controls for all three zones allowing one comfort setting for the cabin if desired The Two and Three Zone ATC System auto matically maintain the interior comfort level desired by the driv
77. other booster source that has a greater than 12 Volt system i e do not use a 24 Volt power Source The battery is stored in a compartment that is ocated behind the left front fender and is accessible through the wheel well Remote battery terminals are located in the left side of the engine compartment for jump starting 1 Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry such as watchbands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact 2 When boosting from a battery in another vehicle park that vehicle within booster cable reach but without allowing the vehicles to touch Set parking brake place automatic transaxle in PARK and turn ignition to LOCK for both vehicles 218 WARNING Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result 3 Turn off the heater radio and all unneces sary electrical loads 4 Remove the protective cover over the re mote jump start positive battery post in the engine compartment Connect one end of the jumper cable to the positive battery post Con nect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery Refer to the following illustration for jump starting con nections 5 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery Make sure you have a good c
78. phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the uconnect phone Depending on the maximum number of en tries downloaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if available previous downloaded phonebook is available for use Only the phonebook of the currently con nected cellular phone is accessible Only the cellular phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the cellular phonebook This downloaded phonebook cannot be ed ited or deleted on the uconnect phone These can only be edited on the cellular phone The changes are transferred and updated to uconnect phone on the next phone connection Phonebook Download Single Entry If equipped and supported by your phone uconnect phone allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the button and say Phonebook Download The system prompts Ready to accept V card entry via Bluetooth The system is now ready to ac cept phonebook entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone Owners Manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE e Phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already co
79. posi tion The sunroof will open fully and then stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any move ment of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manually Press and hold the switch in the forward posi tion Release the switch when the sunroof is in the position desired and it will stop moving If you continue to hold the switch in the forward position the sunroof will close fully and then stop automatically Release the switch once the sunroof stops moving Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release and the sunroof will close automatically from any posi tion The sunroof will close fully and stop auto matically This is called Express Close Dur ing Express Close operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automati cally retract Remove the obstruction if this occurs then press the switch forward and release to Express Close Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc pre vents closing press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move towards the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch
80. regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses Key Fob with factory mated Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and Wireless Ignition Node WIN to prevent unau thorized vehicle operation Therefore only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine 13 After turning the ignition switch to the ON position the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics This condition will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer NOTE The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of secu rity protection All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key
81. remove the key from the ignition and lock your vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equip ment may cause severe personal injuries and death e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally in jured Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Power Door Locks A power door lock switch is on each front door trim panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate Power Door Lock Switch Location 1 Unlock 2 Lock To prevent you from locking your Key Fob in the vehicle the power door lock switch will not operate when the Key Fob is in the ignition and either front door is open A chime will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob Automatic Door Locks If this feature is selected your door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h and all doors are closed It will reset whenever a door is opened 19 The doors will lock automatically if all of the following conditions are met 1 The Automatic Door Locks feature is en abled 2 The transaxle is in gear 3 All doors are closed 4 The throttle is pressed 5 The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h 6 The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitt
82. scrolls through lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once you have the track to be played highlighted on the radio display press the Tune Scroll knob to select and start playing the track By turning the Tune Scroll knob fast you can jump through the list faster During fast scroll you may notice a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display During all List modes the iPod will display all lists in wrap around mode So if the track you wish to select is at the bottom of the list you just turn the Tune Scroll knob backward counter clockwise to get to the track faster Radio Preset Buttons In the List mode the radio preset buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod device e 1 Playlists e 2 Artists e 3 Albums e 4 Genres e 5 Audiobooks e 6 Podcasts After pressing a preset button you will see the list you are in on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line To exit the List mode without selecting a track press the same preset button again to go back to Play mode LIST Button Pressing the LIST button will take to the top level menu of the iPod This takes you to the same top level menu as on your iPod Turn the Tune Scroll knob to list the top menu item you wish to select and then press the Tune Scroll knob This will take you to the next sub menu list item of the iPod and you can follow the same steps
83. seat occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle CAUTION Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Tem perature Control System through an intake grille located in the passenger side trim panel behind the third row seats The heater outlets are located in the passenger side trim panel just behind the sliding door Do not block or place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater outlets The electrical system could overload causing damage to the blower motor 154 Rear Temperature Control To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle rotate the temperature knob counter clockwise to lower the temperature and clock wise to increase the temperature The REAR temperature settings are displayed in the front upper ATC panel When rear controls are locked by the front system the LOCK symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments are ignored Rear Mode Control Auto Mode The rear system automatically maintains the correct mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat occupants Headliner Mode 7 Air comes from the outlets in the head liner Each of these outlets can be indi vidually adjusted to direct the flow of air Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow Bi Level Mode 3e Air comes from both the headliner out gf lets and the floor outlets NOTE In many temperature positio
84. set Changing the Time Zone NOTE You can skip Steps 2 and 3 by pressing and holding the TIME button on the radio for three seconds 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Press and release the SETUP button on the radio 3 If Time Setup is highlighted on the menu press and release the joystick in the center of the radio Otherwise turn the knob surrounding the joystick to select Time Setup and then press and release the joystick 4 Turn the knob surrounding the joystick to scroll to Time Zone and then press and release the joystick 5 If the desired time zone setting has a check mark next to it proceed to the next step Otherwise turn the knob surrounding the joy Stick to select the desired time zone setting and then press and release the joystick A check mark will display next to the selection 6 Press and release the SETUP button to exit the screen Changing Daylight Savings Time When On is selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Pro ceed as follows to change the current setting NOTE You can skip Steps 2 and 3 by pressing and holding the TIME button on the radio for three seconds 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Press and release the SETUP button on the radio 3 If Time Setup is highlighted on the menu press and release the joystick in the center of the radio Otherwise turn the knob surrounding the joystick to s
85. stop flashing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning When a system fault is detected the Tire Pres sure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received 81826bd7 If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still ex ists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash and the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driv ing next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPMS sensors NOTE 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor
86. the vehicle Set the blower at high speed If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the blower switch on the climate control is set at high speed DO NOT use the recircula tion mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly main tained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or misposi tioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required 51 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the seat belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Dam aged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the seat belt Airbag Warning Lig
87. to bring it to the proper level Do not overfill c CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturers recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than that recommended by the manufacturer will re sult in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the correct fluid type Continued CAUTION Continued e Dirt and water in the transaxle can cause serious damage To prevent dirt and water from entering the transaxle after checking or replenishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is re seated properly Fluid Level Check 2 0L Diesel Engine The automatic transaxle has no dipstick and is dealer serviced only Fluid and Filter Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Sec tion 8 for the proper maintenance intervals n addition change the fluid and filter if the transaxle is disassembled for any reason Selection of Lubricant tis important that the proper lubricant is used in the transaxle to assure optimum transaxle performance Use only manufacturer s recom mended transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the pre scribed level using the recommended fluid No chemical flushes shoul
88. to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod sub menu levels are available on this system 145 MUSIC TYPE Button The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your iPod REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel The left and right hand controls are rocker type switches with a pushbutton in the center of each switch Reach behind the steering wheel to access the switches 045003761 Remote Sound Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel 146 Right Hand Switch Functions e Press the top of the switch to increase the volume e Press the bottom of the switch to decrease the volume e Press the button in the center of the switch to change modes i e AM FM etc Left Hand Switch Functions for Radio Operation e Press the top of the switch to SEEK the next listenable station up from the current setting e Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK the next listenable station down from the current setting e Press the button in the center of the switch to tune to the next preset that you have pro grammed Left Hand Switch Functions for Media i e CD Operation e Press the top of the switch once to listen to the next track Press the bottom of the switch once either to listen to the beginning of the current track or to listen to the beginning of the previous track if it is withi
89. worn under your arm is very dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increas ing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision e A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together 28 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision Removing Slack From Belt WARNING e Alap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug e A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfor
90. 0 Rear Fog Light Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the Q rear fog lights are on Refer to Rear Fog Lights in Section 3 for more information 31 Wait To Start Light Diesel Engine Only This light illuminates when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON position Wait until the light turns OFF to start the engine Refer to Normal Starting Diesel Engine under Starting Procedures in Sec tion 5 for more information COMPASS MINI TRIP COMPUTER CMTC IF EQUIPPED NOTE e The compass on your vehicle is self calibrating eliminating the need to manu ally calibrate the compass e If the vehicle is equipped with a Chrysler uconnect gps Navigation Radio the NAV system will provide the compass direction and the variance and calibra tion menus will be unavailable The com pass will perform accurately based on GPS signals instead of the Earth s mag netic field The Compass Mini Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster and features a driver interactive display displays information on out side temperature compass direction and trip information CMTC Reset Buttons CMTC Reset Button Press the left reset button located on the instru ment cluster to scroll through sub menus i e Trio Functions AVG Fuel Economy DTE Elapsed Time and Units To reset the display shown turn the ignition switch to the ON position then press and hold
91. 0c2 License Lamp 2 Insert a small flat blade tool between the end of the lens with the locking tab and the surrounding housing and then pivot the tool to separate the lens from the housing 3 Hold the lens with one hand and rotate the bulb s electrical connector turn counter clockwise with the other hand and then sepa rate the bulb and connector assembly from the lens 4 Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install the replacement bulb 5 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the lens and rotate the connector Ya turn clock wise to lock it in place 6 Insert the end of the lens without the locking tab into the housing on the liftgate and then push the opposite end of the lens into the housing making sure it locks in the housing 255 FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 20 5 Gallons 77 6 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 2 4L Engine SAE 5W 20 ACEA C3 or API Certified 4 5 Quarts 4 26 Liters 2 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 ACEA C3 or API Certified 5 5 Quarts 5 2 Liters 2 0L Diesel Engine Synthetic SAE 5W 30 SAE OW 40 SAE 5W 40 SAE 10W 40 or SAE 4 2 Quarts 4 0 Liters 15W 40 ACEA C3 Cooling System 2 4L Engine and Single or Dual Zone Climate Control System MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 7 9 Quarts 7 5 Liters 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 2 4L Engine and Three Zone Climate Control System MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 9 8 Quarts 9 3 Liters Yea
92. 1930 Zaventem Belgium Tel 0800 6661 Fax 32 02 717 33 GREECE Chrysler Jeep Dodge Hellas 240 242 Kifisias Avenue 15231 Halandri Athens Greece Tel 30 210 6700800 Fax 30 210 6700820 GUATEMALA Grupo Q del Guatemala Edificio Grupo Q calle Mariscal Cruz 9 04 Zona 4 Ciudad de Guatemala Guatemala Tel 502 6685 9500 HONDURAS Grupo Q de Honduras Blvd Centro Am rica frente a Plaza Miraflores Tegucigalpa Honduras Tel 504 235 9220 Fax 504 232 6564 HUNGARY Chrysler Automotive Hungaria Kft H 1133 Budapest Karpat u 21 Tel 36 1 887 7000 Fax 36 1 887 7098 IRELAND C J IRELAND CONCESSIONAIRES LIMITED Clonlara Avenue Baldonnell Business Park Baldonnell Dublin 22 Ireland Tel 1890 946866 ITALY Chrysler Italia S r l Via Giulio Vincenzo Bona 110 00156 Roma Tel 06 41442812 Fax 06 418823114 E mail talktoGchrysler com LATVIA TC MOTORS LTD 40 Krasta Str LV 1003 Riga Tel 07 812 312 FAX 07 812 313 LITHUANIA Silberauto AS Laisves av 125 A LT 2022 VILNIUS Tel 02 301037 Fax 02 301036 NETHERLANDS Chrysler Nederland B V Postbus 2088 NL 3500 GB Utrecht Tel 31 0 30 247 19 11 Fax 31 0 30 247 16 00 NEW ZEALAND Chrysler New Zealand Private Bag 14907 Panmure New Zealand Tel 09573 7800 Fax 09573 7808 NORWAY Chrysler Norge A S Solheimveien 7 N 1471 L renskog Tel 47 67 92 60 00 Fax 47 67 90 53 10 PANAMA Grupo Q de Panam
93. 6 Alterations Modifications Vehicle T Antifreeze Engine Coolant Disposal i Lek ee 239 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 175 176 Anti Lock Warning Light 127 176 177 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 15 Anti Theft System 123 Appearance Care 243 Arming Theft System Security Alarm 15 Assist Hill Start 0 180 Audio Systems Radio 140 Auto Down Power Windows 23 Auto Unlock Doors 20 Automatic Dimming Mirror 59 Automatic Door Locks 19 20 Automatic Oil Change Indicator 124 135 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 150 Automatic Transaxle 166 241 Adding Fluid 242 258 PING uoc mundano ke oe Rex Ow ae 242 Fluid and Filter Changes 242 Fluid Level Check 242 Interlock System 167 Reset Mode 169 Selection Of Lubricant 258 Shiftig i iss moe ode a i 166 Special Additives 243 AutosticK o oea craciau no randi 170 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet Power Outlet 104 Auxiliary Power Outlet 104 Back Up Lights 253 Battery s ea ea Ge d RR 231 Charging System Light 125 Emergency Starting 217 Gas Caution 232 Jump Starting 217 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RRE ged e espa a picas de 17 E rut sod a dete ER
94. 6 Changing 22 24 258 eR be 212 Compact Spare 184 General Information 182 High Speed issus 183 Inflation Pressures 183 JACK vs dg eoo ed e 212 Eifexor TGS ali RR tms 185 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 187 Radial u Eie wk God ee mere 184 Replacement i 185 IOLALOfk 2 5 once eed qme s 186 SIBI m aut diem NUES BI cmd 182 Spare Tire o 212 SPINNING os aa ek 3 185 Trailer TOWING Lata noi htm a 203 Tread Wear Indicators 185 To Open Hood 91 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 201 TOWING 2 30 dia a Sees 198 Disabled Vehicle 221 QUIde cuina ho ded Be 201 Recreational 207 Weight ca siesd ahead e a ees 201 Towing Eyes llus 220 TAGHOM oho erg ce we y daa 171 Traction Control 127 178 Trailer Sway Control TSC 182 Trailer TOWING 198 Cooling System Tips 206 FINCHES fee ri RE 206 Minimum Requirements 202 Jj 2p e a E 205 Trailer and Tongue Weight 201 WIKI ig aces deridet de ee d 203 Trailer Towing Guide 201 Trailer Weight x wg Gos Saa 201 Transaxle Additives 0 243 Automatic 166 241 AutostiK iu kk ea a mms 170 PULSE a cessere qom Boke eth rer sd 242 Maintenance 241 Manual sese 162 165 243 Operation us sob e i 166 OVBIUIVOs uns
95. A s and laptops should be kept away from the top of the instrument panel This is where the compass module is located and such devices may interfere and cause false compass readings 131 132 12 5 low 1 1 42 8 7 12 11640 M 0 CL 3 jo NE AS v N 14 gt y 5 1 SA 4 3 80bbc346 Compass Variance Map To Set the Variance Start the engine and leave the transmission gear selector lever in the PARK position Press and hold the CMTC reset button for approxi mately ten seconds until the current variance zone number is displayed To change the zone press and release the CMTC reset button to increase the variance one step Repeat as necessary until the desired variance is achieved NOTE The factory default zone is 8 During pro gramming the zone value will wrap around from zone 15 to zone 1 Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate and the variance has been properly set you may wish to manually recalibrate the compass To manually calibrate the compass 1 Start the engine and leave the transmission in the PARK position 2 Press and hold the CMTC reset button for approximately 10 seconds until the current variance zone number is displayed 3 Release the CMTC reset button then press and hold again for approximately 10 seconds until the direction is displayed with the CAL indicator o
96. ADDRESS IF RESOLD BY CHRYSLER JEEP DEALERSHIP TELEPHONE NO ENTER DEALER STAMP IN BOX ABOVE FIRST OWNER 80140712 302 CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP NOTIFICATION MODEL REGISTRATION OR LICENSE NUMBER wi me me AL AE A A EA de op or tj NEW OWNER S NAME NEW OWNER S ADDRESS IF RESOLD BY CHRYSLER JEEP DEALERSHIP TELEPHONE NO ENTER DEALER STAMP IN BOX ABOVE SECOND OWNER 80f40753 303 304 About Your Brakes 173 175 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 127 175 176 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 238 239 Adding Fel 5 s eue moe Rx ERE 196 Adding Washer Fluid 235 Additives Fuel 193 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 231 Air Conditioner Maintenance 232 Air Conditioning 147 Air Conditioning Controls 147 Air Conditioning Filter 155 233 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 156 Air Conditioning Rear Zone 153 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 232 233 Air Conditioning System 147 150 232 Air Pressure Tires 126 183 Airbag ups ra oe toned e Rs 32 38 Airbag Deployment 38 Airbag Light 33 37 40 52 129 Airbag Maintenance 39 Airbag Side 34 36 37 38 Airbag Window Side Curtain 34 36 38 Alarm Security Alarm 15 123 Alarm System Security Alarm 15 30
97. ARNING Be certain that the seatback is locked se curely into position Otherwise the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury 87 Forward and Rearward Adjustment The control lever is on the outboard side of the seat Lift the lever to move the seat forward or rearward Release the lever once the seat is in the position desired Then using body pres sure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched Manual Seat Adjustment 88 WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be adjusted properly and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked Recliner Adjustment The control lever is on the outboard side of the seat To recline the seat lean back lift the lever position the seatback as desired and then release the lever To return the seatback to its normal upright position lean back lift the lever lean forward and then release the lever once the seatback is in the upright position Seatback Release WARNING e Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be adjusted properly and you could be injured Adjust
98. Ae ndun ue RS 140 Power BrakeS 2 doedetBedBisahx 175 Door Locks sueros a 19 j c 60 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 104 SES x s hohe e ba dose 84 Steering 0 172 173 o b ata Sey n red Be oe a t 102 Windows o 22 Windows Express Down 17 Power Steering Fluid 258 Power Transfer Unit 258 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 32 Preparation for Jacking 212 Pretensioners Seat Belts 30 Programmable Electronic Features 139 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 16 Radial Ply Tires Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 239 Radio Navigation uconnect gps 140 Radio Operation 141 147 Radio Remote Controls 146 Radio Sound Systems 140 Rear Air Conditioning 153 Rear Camera 100 Rear Cupholder 105 Rear Fog Lights 130 Rear Liftgate 24 Rear Seat Folding 86 90 Rear Window Defroster 113 Rear Window Features 112 Rear Wiper Washer 112 Rearview Mirrors 59 Reclining Front Seats 82 Reclining Rear Seats 88 90 Recreational Towing 207 Refrigerant a uo dee RO RE Rs 233 Release Flood sie ga ek s 91 Reminder Lights On 93 Reminder Seat Belt 32 Remote Keyless Entry RKE
99. Children 12 years and younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front Seating Position or other site Inter Inter Mass a Rear Rear me me Group sen OUt Cen diate diate board ter Out Cen ger board ter Group X U NA U U up to 10 kg Group X U NA U U 0 up to 13 kg Group X U NA U U 1 9 to 18 kg Seating Position or other site Inter Inter Mass E Rear Rear me me Group a Out Cen diate diate board ter Out Cen ger board ter Group X U NA U U I 15 to 25 kg Group X U NA U U Ill 22 to 36 kg Key of letters used in the table above U Suitable for universal category restraints approved for use in this mass group UF Suitable for forward facing universal category restraints approved for use in this mass group L Suitable for particular child restraints given on attached list These restraints may be of the specific vehicle restricted or semi universal categories B Built in restraint approved for this mass group 41 X Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group f a child seat is to be used in the third row the second row seat back directly in front of t
100. D RELEASE LOWER AIR RECIRCULATION CONVERTIBLE TRACTION ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTHOCK WASHER FLUID LEVEL OUTLET 4 WINDOW DOWN CONTROL DRIVE BRAKING SYETEM Pe b mrg Ie zb 07 OF el Y E JA 4WDI BRAKE WINDSHIELD ELECTRONIC BRAKE SYSTEM ENGINE OIL REAR WINDOW CLECTRICALLY PARK LIGHTS REAR FOG UND VEA DEFHOS AND VENTILATINGFAN WINDOW LOCK THROTTLE FOUR WHEEL WARNING PARKING DEFROST HEATED LOWER AIR OUTLET CONTROL DRIVE BRAKE Rm 7 Y TOW 1 ul W a5 bend fi We HAUL BATTERY HEATED MIRROR WINDSHIELD INSTRUMENT PANEL BEAT BELT SLIDING DOOR a DECK AIR CONDITIONING mH RECOGNITION WARNING TOW HAUL CHARGING DEFROST ILLUMINATION BUTTON C e e 4 w e PONa LEMA s GLOW PLUG POWER WINDSHIELD WIPER SIDE AIRBAG AIRBAG SUDINGDOOR EMERGENCY LIGHTER ANDTETHERFOR UCONNECT HAZARD FOUR WHEEL STEERING FLU AND WASHER RELEASE HANDLE CHILDREN LATCH BUTTON DRIVE LOW SRS Y C9 6 E me M Aa lt p tc bs A AS ee MALFUNCTION TRANS ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL PASSENGER DOOR AJAR CONVERTIBLE CONVERTIBLE HORN BEE OWNERS AIR ELECTRONIC INDICATOR LIGHT OIL TEMP TEMPERATURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM AIRBAG OFF TOP DOWN TOP UP MANUAL 150 CONDITIONER STABILITY CONTROL OFF 010507683 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could re sult in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire Owners Manual
101. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pres sure will be too low Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe Speeds within posted speed limits Where Speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintain ing correct tire inflation pressure is very impor tant Increased tire pressure and reduced ve hicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle operation Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures 183 WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capac ity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Always use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewal flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs 184 Compact Spare Tire The compact spare is for temporary emer gency use with radial tires It is engineered t
102. Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you expe rience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back o cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light oads to maximize fuel efficiency AutoStick If Equipped By using the AutoStick9 modes and select ing a specific gear range frequent shifting can be avoided The highest gear range should be selected that allows for adequate performance For example choose 4 if the desired speed can be maintained Choose 3 or 2 if needed to maintain the desired Speed 206 Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to prevent excess heat generation A reduction in vehicle speed may be re quired to avoid extended driving at high RPM Return to a higher gear range or vehicle speed when road conditions and RPM level allows Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transaxle overheating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods shift the trans axle into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily Trailer Hitch Attaching Points Your vehicle will require extra equipment to tow a trailer safely and efficiently The trailer tow hitch must be attached to your vehicle using the provided attaching points on the
103. Entry Deleted Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Enter Number Phonebook Cleared New Entry Added 81c6bf80 Voice Tree Setup Setup Service Toggle Pair List Phones New phone Select a language Confirmation will temporarily Prompts on off Say 4 digit override pin code Phones S phone elect phone A to be deleted List Phones priorities Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing Phone Deleted System System Lists confirms Phones All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605582 77 Voice Commands Voice Commands Voice Commands 78 Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s zero download pager beeper one Dutch Nederlands pair a phone two edit phone pairing pairing three emergency phonebook phonebook four English previous five delete all erase all redial six Espanol select phone select seven Francais send eight German Deutsch set up phone settings or nine help phone set up asterisk star home transfer call plus Italian Italiano uconnect Tutorial hash language try again all all of them list names voice training system training Breakdown se
104. Flush and Refill 237 Inspection s sss eem RR 239 Points to Remember 240 Pressure Cap 239 Radiator Cap 239 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 237 238 256 257 307 Temperature Gauge 122 Corrosion Protection 243 Cruise Control Speed Control 98 Cruise Light a reo RS 126 Cupholders 105 246 Customer Assistance 296 Customer Programmable Features 139 Defroster Rear Window 113 Defroster Windshield 52 148 149 152 Delay Intermittent Wipers 97 Diagnostic System Onboard 228 DieSelFUCl 24 34x ode baa 196 257 Diesel Fuel Requirements 196 Digital Video Disc DVD Player 140 Dimmer Control 0 95 Dimmer Switch Headlight 94 Dipsticks Automatic Transaxle 242 Oil Engine e ce 229 Power Steering 173 Disabled Vehicle Towing 221 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 239 Engine Oil 0 231 Door LOCKS x3 massie em a i 18 308 Door Locks Automatic 19 Downshifting 000 166 Driving On Slippery Surfaces 171 Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water 171 DVD Player Video Entertainment System 143 E 85 Fuel cee ae ea Bees 194 Electric Remote Mirrors 60 Electrical Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet El
105. Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be pro grammed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identifica tion Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure ocation This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fobs to the vehicle electronics A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system serviced bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the authorized dealer Customer Key Programming Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer General Information The Sentry Key Immobilizer system will be used in the following European countries which apply Directive 1999 5 EC Austria Bel gium Czech Republic Denmark Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Ireland Italy Luxembourg Netherlands Norway Po land Portugal Romania Russian Federation Slovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Yugo slavia and United Kingdom Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interfer ence e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interferenc
106. Inflator Units If Equipped The Side Impact SRS Seat Mounted Side Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side airbags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision The ORC monitors the readiness of the elec tronic parts of the system whenever the ignition Switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the items previously mentioned Based on the severity and type of collision the side airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a quantity 37 of non toxic gas The inflating side airbag exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The side airbags fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds The side airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are posi tioned in the area where the side airbag in flates This especially applies to children Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units If Equipped During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC Airbags de pending on severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inf
107. LINE d o o Kovinska 5 10 000 Zagreb Tel 385 1 3441 111 Fax 385 1 3441 113 CZECH REPUBLIC Chrysler Czech Republic s r o Daimlerova 2296 2 149 45 Praha 4 Chodov Czech Republic Tel 420 0 2 71077 111 Tel 420 0 2 25101 111 Fax 420 0 2 71077 507 DENMARK Chrysler Danmark ApS Frederikskaj 4 DK 1790 K benhavn V Tel 45 0 35 256 830 Fax 45 0 35 256 832 DOMINICAN REPUBLIC Reid y Compa ia John F Kennedy Casi Esq Lope de Vega Santo Domingo Dominican Republic Tel 809 562 7211 Fax 809 565 8774 297 ECUADOR Chrysler Jeep Automotriz del Ecuador Av Juan Tanca Marengo km 4 5 Guayaquil Ecuador Tel 593 4 225 7935 Fax 593 4 224 7787 EL SALVADOR Grupo Q del Salvador Blvd Los Pr ceres y Avenida No 1 Lomas de San Francisco San Salvador El Salvador Tel 503 22730988 Fax 503 278 5731 ESTONIA Silberauto AS Jarvevana tee 11 11314 Tallinn Tel 06 266 098 Tel 06 266 050 Fax 06 266 066 298 FINLAND Chrysler FinlandOy Ristipellontie 5 00390 HELSINKI Tel 020 54771 Fax 020 5477 485 FRANCE Chrysler France Parc de Rocquencourt BP100 F 78153 Le Chesnay Cedex Tel 33 1 39 23 56 00 Fax 33 1 39 23 57 92 GERMANY Chrysler Deutschland GmbH Englische StraBe 30 D 10587 Berlin Telefon 49 0 30 2690 0 Telefax 49 0 30 2690 3999 GRAND DUCHY OF LUXEMBOURG NT MAILFAS C O Chrysler Belgium Luxembourg BRU BRU 37850 Antwoord Nummer 193032
108. N or ACC position Rear Power Outlet NOTE e To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used e Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced e The power outlet on the bottom of the center console shares the fuse with the power outlet on the back of the console The combined usage must not exceed 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts WARNING To avoid serious injury or death e Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet e Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle e f this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure CAUTION e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these intermittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accesso ries or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must
109. Neck Loop Method 818e6760 818e675b Detachable Ball Clip Loop Method For fixed ball tow bar attach the clip directly to the designated point This alternative must be specifically permitted by the trailer manu facturer since the clip may not be sufficiently strong for use in the way 818e6762 Detachable Ball Neck Loop Method 200 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Transaxle Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt b Passenger Model Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt 7 Passenger Model Max Tongue Wt 5 Passenger Model Max Tongue Wt 7 Passenger Model 2 4L Automatic or Manual 40 sq ft 3 7 sq m 2 400 Ibs 1 100 kg 2 400 Ibs 1 100 kg 120 lbs 55 kg 120 Ibs 55 kg 2 7L Automatic 40 sq ft 3 7 sq m 3 500 Ibs 1 600 kg 3 000 Ibs 1 360 kg 175 lbs 80 kg 158 lbs 68 kg 2 0L Diesel 40 sq ft 3 7 sq m 3 500 lbs 1 600 kg 3 000 Ibs 1 360 kg 175 Ibs 80 kg 150 lbs 68 kg Automatic or Manual Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds O The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and it should never exceed the weight refer enced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Trailer and Tongue Weight Loads balanced over the wheels or heavi
110. RAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Continued WARNING Continued e Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle you should always shift the vehicle into PARK remove the key fob from the ignition switch and apply the parking brake Once the key fob is removed from the ignition switch the shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave unattended chil dren inside a vehicle Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK prior to turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position The key fob can only be removed from the ignition switch when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position and once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK Brake Transaxle Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmis sion Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the
111. RNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to an accident You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use Mist Feature Push downward on the windshield wiper washer control lever to activate a single wipe cycle to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from a passing vehicle The wipers will continue to operate until you release the lever 031507504 Mist Control 97 HEADLIGHT WASHERS IF EQUIPPED The Headlight Washers are recessed into the top of the fascia centrally located below each headlight The windshield wiper washer control lever op erates the headlight washers when the ignition switch is in the ON position and the headlights are ON The lever is located on the right side of the steering column To use the headlight washers pull the wind shield wiper lever inward toward the steering wheel to activate the windshield washers and release it When this is done the two stationary washer nozzles at each headlight spray two timed high pressure sprays of washer fluid onto each headlight lens In addition the windshield washers will spray the windshield and the wind shield wipers will cycle NOTE The headlight washers will operate on the first spray of the windshield washer and then every eleventh spray after that
112. RSE R position Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a complete stop NOTE During cold weather until the transaxle lu bricant is warm you may experience slightly higher shift efforts This is normal and not harmful to the transaxle Downshifting Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and prolong engine life 166 CAUTION If you skip a gear while downshifting or down shift at too high a vehicle speed you could damage the engine transaxle or clutch To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake ife shift down to second or first when descend ing a steep grade When turning a corner or driving up a steep grade downshift early so that the engine will not be overburdened AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE IF EQUIPPED CAUTION Damage to the transaxle may occur if the following precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Continued CAUTION Continued e Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed e Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal NOTE You must press and hold the brake pedal down while shifting out of PARK WARNING e Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUT
113. T DECEL lever once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed decrease Each time the lever is tapped speed decreases 100 To Accelerate for Passing Press the accelerator pedal as you would nor mally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Speed Control on Hills NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system main tains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with the Park View Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the Navigation Multimedia radio display screen WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Always check carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions or blind sp
114. TC UT 72 e VOICE RECOGNITION VR SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED 79 e Voice Recognition VR System Operation 79 ex COMMANGS Ir TT 79 VO C MANN TUTTI 81 o SEATS o da ere e ESTE O 81 e Manual Forward and Rearward Adjustments 81 e Recliner Adjustment lt ss oe a ee 82 Lumbar Support If Equipped 82 e Driver Side Seat Height Adjustment If Equipped 83 e Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat If Equipped 83 e Power Seat If Equipped lees 84 e Adjusting Active Head Restraints 84 Heated Seats If Equipped less 85 e Second Row Passenger Seats 86 e Third Row Passenger Seats with Fold Flat Feature Seven Passenger Models 90 e TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 91 SIFIGETS SET ce Som TER EE ET EI 92 e Multifunction Lever c es a ao ees Goel es 92 e Headlights and Position Lights 92 54 56 e Sunroof Maintenance a a o SES e Ignition Off Operation gr e Sunroof Fully Closed ie me areas re re sie eoe E a e ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS sCUPHOPDERS r a oe EIS STORAGE an a E E E E since e Instrument Panel Storage Compartment f Equipped caca ao wraps es ewan a anus e Center Console Storage eee e Flip n Stow Front Passenger Seat Storage If Eguipped TTC e Second Row Passenger Seat Temporary Storage Bin e Second Ro
115. TOP LIGHT Switch M38 25 Amp Lock Unlock Natural Motors 250 K1 Ignition Run Accessory Relay K2 Ignition Run Relay K3 Starter Solenoid a Relay K4 Ignition Run Start Relay K5 NGC Powertrain Control Module Relay PCM K6 ze Electric Back Light EBL Relay K7 K8 K9 Rear Blower Relay K10 R ASD Relay Feed for M19 and M21 K11 Radiator Fan Re lay Low Speed VEHICLE STORAGE If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to preserve your battery You may e Remove the IOD Ignition Off Draw mini fuses from the Totally Integrated Power Mod ule located in the engine compartment e Or disconnect the battery negative cable REPLACEMENT BULBS All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Courtesy Reading Lamps Incandescent 578 Courtesy Reading Lamps Optional LED lt s i in sd Ra LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Glove Box Lamp 194 Cargo Lampis sect a 579 Optional Door Map Pocket Cupholder LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer NOTE For lighted switches see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions LIGHTS BULBS Outside Bulb No Low Beam Headlamp
116. UAGE When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the RESET button while in this display to select English French Italian German Spanish or Dutch Then as you continue the information will display in the selected language NOTE The EVIC will not change the uconnect language selection AUTO DOOR LOCK When auto door lock is turned on all doors will automatically lock when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF is displayed AUTO UNLK ON EXIT When ON is selected all doors and the liftgate will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transaxle is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears RKE UNLOCK When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE UNLOCK but ton When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger doors and liftgate When AII Doors 1st Press is selected all doors and the liftgate will unlock on the first press of the RKE UNLOCK button To make your selection press and release the RESET button until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press app
117. V Transmission Pink Module Green Motor Range If Equipped If Equipped J19 60Amp __ Radiator Fan J3 30 Amp Rear Door Module J10 30 Amp If Equipped Yellow Motor Pink Pink Headlamp Washer J20 30 Amp Front Windshield J4 25 Amp Driver Door Node m Relay BUX Mani Pink v Wiper Hi Low Natural fold Tuning Valve J21 20Amp ___ Front Rear Washer J5 25 Amp Passenger Door J11 30 Amp If Equipped Sway Blue Natural __ Node Pink Bar Thatchum Se J22 25 Amp Sunroof Module J6 40 Amp Anti Lock Brake curity BUX Power Natural _ If Equipped Green System ABS Sliding Door M1 15 Amp Center High Pump Electronic J13 60Amp Ignition Off Draw Blue Mounted Stop Stability Program Yellow IOD Main Light CHMSL ESP J14 40 Amp u Electric Back Light M2 20 Amp If Equipped J7 30 Amp Anti Lock Brake Green EBL Yellow Trailer Lights Pink System ABS J15 30Amp __ Rear Blower M3 20 Amp Front Rear Axle Valve Electronic Pink If Equipped Yellow AWD Mod Stability Program J17 40Amp __ Starter Solenoid M4 10 Amp Trailer Tow ESP Green Red If Equipped 247 248 Underhood Light Car Car m Car m d A mage Hie Description de tridge a Description p tridge E Description use Fuse Fuse M5 25 Amp Power Inverter M10 15 Amp
118. View On or Off Without Navigation Radio 1 Press the menu hard key 2 Select system setup soft key 3 Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting enable rear camera in reverse soft key 4 When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE an image of the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to check entire surround ings displayed across the top of the screen 5 When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear camera mode is exited and the audio screen appears again OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights storage for sunglasses an inte rior observation mirror and an optional power sunroof switch Overhead Console Courtesy Reading Lights Refer to Courtesy Reading Lights under Lights in Section 3 101 Sunglasses Storage To access the storage compartment press on the raised bars on the compartment door in the center of the console and release and the door will swing downward Interior Observation Mirror The convex interior observation mirror provides the driver and front seat passenger a wide field of view to conveniently view passengers sitting in the rear passenger seats To use the interior observation mirror press on the raised bars on the compartment door and release the door will swing downward then raise the door until it is almost closed and release The door will latch in position to use the interior observati
119. a where the side curtain airbag is located should remain free from any ob structions e Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side airbags the performance could be adversely af fected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position everyone for the best interaction with the Advanced Front airbag Along with seat belts and pretensioners Ad vanced Front Airbags work with the knee bol sters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant pro tection Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag Children 12 years old and younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deploy ment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see Section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Nev
120. achieved Recommended torque is 95 ft lbs 130 N m JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an auto matic transaxle cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic con verter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle This type of start can be dan gerous if done improperly so follow this proce dure carefully WARNING e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON You can be hurt by the fan e Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution that can cause serious burns do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or cloth ing Wear safety glasses and protect your eyes at all times If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush contaminated area immedi ately with large quantities of water e Abattery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other Continued 217 WARNING Continued e Do not use a booster battery or any
121. agnosed and corrected Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Section 5 for more information WARNING If a warning light remains on the system may not be working and you will not have the benefit of ESP or BAS Under certain driving conditions where ESP or BAS would be ben eficial you if you have not adjusted your driving speeds and stopping in or to account for the lack of the feature may be in accident 26 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake func tions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Pro gram ESP system In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been cor rected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A l
122. al deceleration The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions Side airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because airbag sensors measure vehicle de celeration over time vehicle speed and dam age by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating airbag The ORC monitors the readiness of the elec tronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON position If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or it becomes discon nected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Airbag o Warning Light in the instrument ry panel for approximately four to six seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunc tion in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is not
123. alues to show that the TPMS is receiving sensor data 192 General Information Transmitter and receivers operate on a carrier frequency of 433 92 MHz as required by EEC regulations These devices must be certified to conform to specific regulations in each indi vidual country Two sets of regulations are involved ETS European Telecommunication Standard 300 220 which most countries use and German BZT federal regulation 2257125 which is based on ETC 300 220 but has addi tional unique requirements Other defined re quirements are noted in ANNEX VI of COMMIS SION DIRECTIVE 95 56 EC Operation is subject to the following two conditions e This device may not cause harmful interfer ence e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation FUEL REQUIREMENTS GASOLINE ENGINES 2 4L and 2 7L Engines All engines are designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality un leaded gasoline with a minimum research oc tane rating of 91 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stal
124. ance To Empty DTE Elapsed Time Units In System Status Mes sages and Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features MENU 134 COMPASS TEMPERATURE Button Press this button to display the Compass Outside Temperature Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages e Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mi 1 6 km with either turn signal on e Left Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Right Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e RKE Battery Low with a single chime Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not in PARK automatic transaxle Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle in Motion manual transaxle Channel Transmit Refer to Garage Door Opener in Section 2 Channel Training Refer to Garage Door Opener in Section 2 Channel Trained Refer to Garage Door Opener in Section 2 Clearing Channels Refer to Garage Door Opener in Section 2 Channels Cleared Refer to Garage Door Opener in Section 2 Did Not Train Refer to Garage Opener in Section 2 Door Left Front Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to information on Tire Pres sure
125. ancel this feature e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches radio power sun o o BR Wn roof if equipped and ignition powered power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening ei ther front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Re fer to Key Off Power Delay under Per sonal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 4 WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leav ing unattended children in a vehicle is danger ous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Key In Ignition Reminder If you open the driver s door and the key is in the ignition a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic
126. and Tire Pressure Monitor in Sec ion 5 Left Rear Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to information on Tire Pressure and Tire Pressure Monitor in Section 5 Right Front Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to information on Tire Pres sure and Tire Pressure Monitor in Sec tion 5 Right Rear Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to information on Tire Pres sure and Tire Pressure Monitor in Sec tion 5 Check TPM System with a single chime Refer to information on Tire Pressure Moni tor in Section 5 Low Fuel Cal Oil Change Required with a single chime Low Washer Fluid Coolant Low Key in Ignition Lights On Oil Change Required vehicles equipped with 2 0L Diesel with oil change indicator system Oil Change Required If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine oil change indicator system If so equipped the Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Menu but ton To reset th
127. and 2 for the opposite rear door NOTE After disengaging the Child Protection Door Lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position WINDOWS Power Windows The window controls on the driver s door trim panel control all of the door windows Power Window Switches There are single window controls on each pas senger door trim panel which operate the passenger door windows The window controls will operate when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position NOTE e For vehicles not equipped with the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Key Off Power Delay under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures under Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC in Section 4 eeWARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unattended children can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may re
128. ates automatically once the excessively sway ing trailer is recognized When TSC is functioning the ESP TCS Indicator Light will flash the engine power will be reduced and you will feel the brake being applied to indi vidual wheels in an attempt to stop the trailer from swaying NOTE The TSC is disabled when the ESP system is in the Partial Off mode WARNING e The TSC cannot stop all trailers from sway ing Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the tongue weight recom mendations Refer to Vehicle Loading and Trailer Towing in this section for more information before towing a trailer with your vehicle Continued 182 WARNING Continued e f TSC activates while towing a trailer stop the vehicle at the nearest safe location and adjust the trailer load to eliminate the trailer sway e Failure to follow these warnings can result in an accident or serious personal injury TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure Safety WARNING Continued Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure e Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems You could lose control of your vehicle e Over inflated or under in
129. atings WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury acci dent Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Continued 202 WARNING Continued e Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and that it will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully se cured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Over loading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes axle engine transaxle steering suspension chassis structure or tires Safety chains must always be used be tween your vehicle and trailer Always con nect the chains to the frame or hook retain ers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Continued WARNING Continued Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the park ing brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transaxle in PARK Al ways block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed be tween the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exce
130. ave its own brakes and they should be of adequate ca pacity Failure to do this could lead to accel erated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances WARNING e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehi cle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident Continued WARNING Continued e Towing any trailer will increase your stop ping distance When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident Towing Requirements Trailer Lights and Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a seven pin or a thirteen pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and connec tor NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness 203 The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector 81789d4e Seven Pin Connector Pin Function Wire Color Number 1 Left Turn Signal Yellow 2 Rear Fog Light Blue 3 Ground Common White Return 4 Right Turn Signal Green 204 Pin Number Function Wire Color 5 R
131. ay COMPASS TEMPERATURE Button Press and release this button to display one of eight compass readings and the outside tempera ture The compass readings indi cate the direction the vehicle is facing Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which elimi nates the need to calibrate the compass manu ally When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may cali brate the compass by slowly completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic or is inaccurate you can calibrate the compass manually by performing the following steps 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC 3 Press the SCROLL button until CALIBRATE COMPASS displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the RESET button to start the calibration The message CAL will display in the EVIC 5 Slowly complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and geographic North To allow the compas
132. ay mode In Play mode you may use the following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the iPod and display data Tune Scroll Knob Use the Tune Scroll knob to go to the next or previous track The Tune Scroll knob functions similar to the scroll wheel on the iPod mobile digital device Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click during the first two seconds of the track will jump to the previous track in the list and turning this button at any other time in the track will jump to the beginning of the current track RW Rewind Button Press and hold the RW button to move back ward in the current track Holding the RW button long enough will take you back to the beginning of the current track Pressing and releasing the RW button will go back five seconds of the current track FF Fast Forward Button Press and hold the FF button to move forward in the current track Pressing and releasing the FF button will go forward five seconds of the current track SEEK Buttons Use the SEEK buttons to move to the previous or the next track If the left down button is pressed during the first two seconds of the current track it will go back to the previous track in the list if you press this button at any other time in the current track it will go back to the beginning of the track If the right up button is pressed du
133. ay result in unsatisfac tory coolant performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be in spected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper mainte nance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the Brake Warning Light indi cates system failure Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when performing underhood services Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended be cause it may cause leaking in the system Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for t
134. bag label sewn into the outboard side of the seat I Seat Mounted Side Airbag Label 81ddd8b6 When the bag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each bag deploys independently that is a left side impact deploys the left bag only and a right side impact deploys only the right bag Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC If Equipped SABIC airbags offer side impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat out board occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each airbag features in flated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the poten tial for side impact head injuries The curtains deploy downward covering both windows on the impact side 1 022607261 Supplemental Side Curtain Airbags NOTE e Should a vehicle rollover occur the pre tensioners and or SABIC airbags on both sides of the vehicle may deploy e Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment The system includes sensors adjacent to both front and rear seat occupants that are cali brated to deploy the SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag occupant protec tion WARNING e If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The are
135. be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of acces Sory or accessory bracket from the plug CUPHOLDERS Two cupholders are located in the center con sole for front passengers Cep c s 035108738 Center Console Cupholders 105 For passengers in the second row there are two cupholders located in the center armrest Armrest Cupholders For vehicles equipped with third row seating there are additional cupholders located in the quarter trim panels 106 SS Quarter Trim Panel Cupholders Seven Passenger Models In addition to the cupholders some vehicles may be equipped with bottle holders Bottle holders are located on the door trim panels if equipped 81d02982 Door Bottle Holder WARNING If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle holder they can spill when the door is closed burning the occupants Be careful when closing the doors to avoid injury STORAGE Instrument Panel Storage Compartment If Equipped Press and release the button on the door to open it The door swings upward to allow easy access to the compartment Instrument Panel Storage Compartment Center Console Storage Open storage areas or cubby bins are located in the floor console and center console Floor Console Cubby Bin Center Console Cubby Bin
136. be ees 84 Rear Folding 86 90 Reclining 82 Reclining Rear 88 90 Seatback Release 83 86 90 WHITING oz ee oh os ats hol E 84 314 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 15 123 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 237 238 257 Selection of Oil 230 Sentry Key Immobilizer 13 Sentry Key Programming 14 Sentry Key Replacement 14 Service Assistance 296 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator 127 Setting the Clock 141 Settings Personal 139 Shifting Automatic Transaxle 166 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 29 Shoulder Belts 26 Side Airbag 0 0 37 Side Repeater Lights 253 Side View Mirror Adjustment 59 Side Window Demisters Defrosters 155 Signals Tun 52 94 123 253 Slippery Surfaces Driving On 171 Snow Chains Tire Chains 186 Sound Systems Radio 140 MU E Refer to the Sound Systems Booklet ghd AE eS had ek 184 212 Sound Systems Spare Tire Spark PlugS iuh 4 Gos cen x Res 257 Specifications Fuel Gasoline 257 IE E SAR o Geet qd rud E 230 257 Speed Control Cruise Control 98 Speedometer 123 Stand 3 0 ee Doer uon da es 162 Automatic Transmission 162 Cold Weather 163 Emergency Jum
137. be folded flat This allows for extended cargo space and still maintains some seating room if needed NOTE Prior to folding the second row passenger seat make sure the front seatback is not in areclined position This will allow the seat to fold easily WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly e On seven passenger models do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat with the second row seatback s folded flat In a collision the passenger could slide under neath the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured To Fold the Seat 1 Locate the control lever on the lower out board side of the seat Seatback Release 2 Place one hand on the seatback and apply a gentle pressure 3 Lift the control lever with the other hand allow the seatback to move forward slightly and then release the lever WARNING To prevent personal injury or damage to ob jects keep your head arms and objects out of the folding path of the seatback 4 Gently guide the seatback into the folded position To Unfold the Seat Raise the seatback and lock it in place W
138. beam head lights are on Switching from low beam to high beam headlights may cause the fog lights to turn off depending on your local regulations 94 Rear Fog Lights The rear fog lights may be operated O as desired when visibility is poor due to fog To activate the rear fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights pull out the end of the multifunction lever and rotate the lever to the last detent Use rear fog lights in accor dance with local laws Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever upward or down ward and the corresponding turn signal indica tor on the instrument panel will flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights VZ Turn Signal Control 031407688 You can signal a lane change by moving the lever upward or downward partially without moving beyond the detent NOTE If either turn signal indicator has a very fast flash rate check for an inoperative outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved see your authorized dealer for service Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash to Pass You can si
139. between Flexible Fuel and gasoline only powered vehicles 81ae46ab E 85 Fuel Cap CAUTION Only vehicles with the E 85 fuel filler door label can operate on E 85 81ae46a9 E 85 Badge Ethanol Fuel E 85 E 85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline WARNING Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap gas cap or filling the tank Do not use E 85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame Fuel Requirements f your vehicle is E 85 compatible it will operate on unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 or E 85 fuel or any mixture of these two uels For best results a refueling pattern that avoids alternating between E 85 and un leaded gasoline is recommended When you do switch fuel types it is recom mended that e you do not add less than 5 gal 19 L when refueling e you drive the vehicle immediately after refu eling for at least 5 miles 8 km Observing these precautions will avoid pos sible hard starting and or significant deteriora tion in driveability during warm up NOTE e Use seasonally adjusted E 85 fuel ASTM D5798 With non seasonally adjusted E 85 fuel you may experience hard start ing and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are fol lowed especia
140. boot seals and replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 90 000 Miles 135 000 km or 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule filter Rotate tires Replace the fuel filter O O O C J Change the engine oil and engine oil Replace the engine air cleaner filter Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 287 100 000 Miles 150 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Change manual transaxle fluid Inspect accessory drive belt replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Replace timing belt and timing belt tensioner Flush and replace engine coolant Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals and replace if necessary OCO CO C O C O Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 110 000 Miles 165 000 km or 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Cha
141. ce turning stopping and backing up the trailer in an area 9 c d E ocated away from heavy traffic 10 Power Supply Red Manual Transaxle If Equipped Controlled by Igni f using a manual transaxle vehicle for trailer tion Switch 12V towing all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid 112 Return for Contact White clutch slippage Pin 10 Automatic Transaxle If Equipped 12 Reserve for Red Blue The DRIVE range can be selected when tow Future Allocation ing However if frequent shifting occurs while in this range select the 3 range for four speed automatic or the 5 range for six speed auto matic NOTE Using the 3 or 5 range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating condi tions will improve performance and extend transaxle life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation then change the automatic manual transaxle fluid and automatic transaxle filter according to the interval specified for police taxi fleet or fre quent trailer towing Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper mainte nance intervals NOTE Check the four speed automatic transaxle fluid level before towing The six speed transaxle is sealed and the fluid level cannot be checked See your authorized dealer for assistance 205
142. ch of these features operate indepen dently from each other If any one feature is controlled manually the temperature doors will continue to operate automatically The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by pressing the Front Upper ATC Panel blower rocker button The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the ve hicle and cancel the AUTO mode 151 The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the following posi tions Panel Mode 7 Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted for direction and turned on or off to control airflow NOTE For maximum airflow to the rear the center instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear seat passengers Bi Level Mode 7 Air comes from the instrument panel y outlets floor outlets and defrost outlets A slight amount of air is also directed through the side window demister outlets NOTE In many temperature positions the BI LEVEL mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets 152 Floor Mode e Air comes from the floor outlets A slight e amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister out lets Mix Mode Ye Air comes from the floor defrost and ey side window demist outlet
143. change intervals exceed 20 000 miles 30 000 km or two years whichever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the sched uled oil change If this scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your autho rized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Oil Change Required Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center or under Odometer Trip Odom eter under Instrument Cluster Description in Section 4 of this manual At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level and add as re quired e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once a Month e Check the tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reser voir brake master cylinder power steering and transaxle and add as needed e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation At Each Oil Change e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the exhaust system e Inspect the brake linings hoses and cali pers e Inspect the CV joints and suspension com ponents e Check the coolant level hoses and clamps e Inspect the accessory drive belt s CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle Required Maintenance Intervals Refe
144. cle Division P O Box 4214 Mulgrave 3170 Ph 03 9566 9266 AUSTRIA Chrysler Austria Gesellschaft m b H Felmayergasse 2 A 1210 Wien Tel 43 1 5465 15131 Fax 43 1 5465 15132 BALANCE OF THE CARIBBEAN Interamericana Trading Company Warrens St Michael Barbados West Indies Tel 246 417 8000 Fax 246 425 2888 BELGIUM Chrysler Belgium Luxembourg NV Tollaan 68 B 1200 Brussel Tel 0800 94634 free phone number Fax 32 0 2 717 3301 BOLIVIA Ovando amp Cia S A Av Cristobal de Mendoza 2do Anillo y Canal Isuto Santa Cruz Bolivia Tel 591 3 336 3100 Fax 591 3 334 0229 BRAZIL Chrysler do Brasil Av Alfred Jurzykowski 562 09680 900 Sao Bernardo do Campo S P Tel 55 11 4173 6611 Fax 55 11 4173 9200 BULGARIA BALKAN STAR Resbarska Str 5 1510 Sofia Tel 359 2 91988 Fax 359 2 945 40 14 CHILE Comercial Chrysler S A Av Americo Vespucio 1601 Quilicura Santiago Chile Tel 56 2 620 7600 Fax 56 2 730 6201 CHINA Chrysler Group China Sales Limited 16F Gemdale Plaza Tower A No 91 Jian Guo Road Chaoyang District Beijing 100022 P R China Chrysler Brand Tel 400 650 1195 Dodge Brand Tel 400 650 0118 COLOMBIA Chrysler Colombia S A Avenida Calle 26 70A 25 Bogot Colombia Tel 57 1 4236700 Fax 57 1 410 5667 COSTA RICA AutoStar La Uruca frente al Banco Nacional San Jos Costa Rica Tel 506 295 0000 Fax 506 295 0052 CROATIA EURO
145. cle Weight Rating GVWR e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Type of Vehicle e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN 197 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING Because the front wheels steer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maxi mum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is ex ceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide 198 satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commer cial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important tha
146. comfort while reducing moisture on the wind shield Defrost Mode Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use DEFROST mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX and DEFROST or a blend of these modes even if the A C button is not pressed This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary Recirculation Control Press this button to choose be tween outside air intake or recircu lation of the air inside the vehicle A lamp will illuminate when you are in RECIRCULATION mode Only use the RECIRCULATION mode to temporarily block out any outside odors smoke or dust and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial start up in very hot or humid weather C NOTE If the RECIRCULATION button is pressed when the system is in MIX DEFROST or FLOOR mode the RECIRCULATION LED indicator will flash 3 times and then turn off to indicate RECIRCULATION mode is not allowed Continuous use of the RECIRCULATION mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended In cold or damp weather the use of the RECIRCULATION mode will cause win dows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle For maximum defogging select the outside air position In
147. coolants antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection If a non HOAT coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be re placed with the specified coolant anti freeze as soon as possible e Do not use plain water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze prod ucts Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be com patible with the radiator engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based coolants Use of Propylene Glycol based coolants is not recommended Selection Of Coolant 2 0L Diesel Engine Only Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lubri cants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct coolant type CAUTION Do not use HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology products in the Diesel Engine e Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be com patible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based coolants Use of Propylene Glycol based coolants is not recommended 238 Adding Coolant Gasoline Engines Your vehicle has been built with an improved
148. ct phone with Navigation or Multimedia radio refer to the Navigation or Multimedia radio s User s Manual separate booklet uconnect phone section uconnect phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system uconnect phone allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Jim Work or Dial 151 1234 5555 Your cellular phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s au dio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the uconnect phone uconnect phone allows you to transfer calls between the uconnect phone and your cellu lar phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the uconnect phone s microphone for private conversation The uconnect phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free profile cellular phone 61 uconnect phone features Bluetooth technol ogy the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so uconnect phone works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s uconnect phone The uconnect phone al lows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the uconnect phone
149. ct gps New Vehicle Break In Period Occupant Restraints Occupant Restraints Sedan Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel Navigation Radio uconnect gps 140 100 140 PE 50 25 86 38 34 36 38 si 192 257 Odometer TOI s ded n pri me ER 126 129 Oil Change Indicator 124 135 Oil Change Indicator Reset 124 135 OW ENGINE iu ge eek Rn 229 257 Capacity zum d ux koe ated 256 Change Interval 124 135 230 CHECKING sas sk xs 229 DIDSUCK RP 229 Disposal uk BR OS Res 231 FILET sax Ee 231 257 Filter Disposal 231 Identification Logo 230 Materials Added to 231 Recommendation 230 256 SVGMIMCUG sean Se eee wad Bae Es 231 Viscosity ss 230 231 256 Oil Filter Change 231 Oil Filter Selection 231 Onboard Diagnostic System 228 Operating Precautions 228 Outside Rearview Mirrors 59 Overdrive 123 169 Overhead Console 101 Overheating Engine 122 211 Paint Care ea au pb ee we s 243 Parking Brake sss 173 Passenger Seat Back Tilt Easy Entry System 89 Passing Light 94 Personal Settings 139 uj odes sca le be Sa ae ee de 50 Phone Cellular 61 140 141 Phone Hands Free uconnect 61 140 141 Port Universal Serial Bus USB 140 USB os B
150. ctions could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required 236 WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you uncon scious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Exhaust Gas under Safety Tips in Section 2 CAUTION The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will de stroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause seri ous damage to the engine Under normal operating conditions the cata ytic converter will not require maintenance However it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst opera tion and prevent possible catalyst damage CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your ve hicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat result ing in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle NOTE Intentional tampering with em
151. ctiveness This will be evi dent by increased pedal travel during applica tion and greater pedal force required to slow or stop the vehicle In addition if the malfunction is caused by a leak in the hydraulic system the Brake System Warning Light will turn on as the brake fluid level drops in the master cylin der In the event power assist is lost for any reason i e repeated brake applications with the en gine OFF the brakes will still function How ever the effort required to brake the vehicle wil be much greater than that required with the power system operating WARNING e Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake tempera tures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You wouldn t have your full braking capacity in an emergency Driving a vehicle with the Brake System Warning Light on is dangerous A signifi cant decrease in braking performance or vehicle stability during braking may occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining ve hicle control under adverse braking conditions 175 The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock up to help avoid skiddi
152. current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited List All uconnect Phonebook Names e Press the o button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The uconnect phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phonebook entries if available To call one of the names in the list press the e button during the playing of the de SA sired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The uconnect phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the uconnect phone if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the uconnect V phone Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the uconnect phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep indicatin
153. d be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situa tions the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing 127 CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Im mediate service is required WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as refer enced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants or wood or cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or others 128 25 Electronic Stability Program ESP Brake Assist System BAS Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped The yellow ESP BAS Malfunction ESP Indicator Light will turn on when BAS the ignition switch is turned to the ON position The light should go out with the engine running The system will turn the light on con tinuously while the engine is running if it detects a malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS or both If this light remains on after the several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem di
154. d Turbocharger Temperature Idle Time in minutes Before Shut Down Stop amp Go Empty Cool Less than 1 Stop amp Go Medium Warm 1 Highway Speeds Medium Warm 2 City Traffic Max GCWR Warm 3 Highway Speeds Max GCWR Warm 4 Uphill Grade Max GCWR Hot 5 MANUAL TRANSAXLE IF EQUIPPED WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle especially on an incline Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears As you release the clutch pedal lightly press the accelerator pedal 80f7bc4b Shift Pattern Five Speed 8191bf86 Shift Pattern Six Speed Use each gear in numerical order do not skip a gear Be sure the transaxle is in first gear not third when starting from a standing position Damage to the clutch can result from starting in third 165 For most city driving you will find it easier to use only the lower gears For steady highway driv ing with light accelerations fifth gear on a five speed and sixth on a six speed is recom mended Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged This will cause abnormal wear on the clutch To shift into REVERSE with a six speed pull up on the ring just below the gear shift knob and then move into the REVE
155. d and the seat moves forward on its tracks 81d1 wf Tip n Slide Control Lever 2181144203 Tip n Slide Seat 89 NOTE A handgrip is molded into the front of each quarter trim panel near the door opening to assist entry and exit from the third row pas senger seats Grab Handle WARNING Do not drive the vehicle with the seat in this position as it is only intended for entering and exiting the third row seats Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury 90 To Unfold and Move the Second Row Passenger Seat Rearward 1 Move the seatback rearward until it locks in place and then continue sliding the seat rear ward on its tracks until it locks in place 2 Push the seat cushion downward to lock it in place 3 Adjust the seat track position as desired Then using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched WARNING Be certain that the seatback and seat are locked securely into position Otherwise the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury Third Row Passenger Seats with Fold Flat Feature Seven Passenger Models To provide additional storage area each third row passenger seat can be folded flat This allows for extended cargo space and still main tains some rear seating room if needed NOTE
156. d be used in any trans axle only the approved lubricant may be used Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engi neered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Therefore do not add any fluid additives to the transaxle The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmis sion as the chemicals can damage your trans mission components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Manual Transaxle If Equipped Fluid Level Check Visually inspect manual transaxle for leakage at each oil change Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper fluid level Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more that 3 16 4 7 mm below the bottom of the hole Lubricant Selection Use only manufacturers recommended trans mission fluid Do not add any materials other than leak detection dyes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Frequency Of Fluid Change Change the manual transaxle fluid at the inter vals shown in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body
157. d release the button on the door to open it the large door will swing upward to allow easy access to the compartment con tents Chill Zone Beverage Cooler Operation The blower speed setting on the climate control sets the rate at which the air flows into the compartment The airflow control valve inside the compartment determines how much air flows into the compartment Turning the valve rearward increases the airflow while turning the valve forward decreases the airflow Turning the valve all the way forward will turn off the airflow into the compartment Airflow Control Valve The compartment cools when the airflow is open the engine is running and the Air Condi tioning A C is on or the Automatic Tempera ture Control ATC system is set for automatic operation if equipped This allows you to cool the compartment when the climate control is in the cooling or heating mode 109 NOTE Whether operating a Manual Heating and A C system or operating an ATC system in the manual mode the A C indicator must be ON to cool the compartment CARGO AREA FEATURES Rechargeable Flashlight If Equipped The rechargeable LED flashlight stores in its charging station in the left rear quarter trim panel To remove it press on the indent on the side of the flashlight and release Rechargeable Flashlight 110 NOTE Be sure to return the flashlight to its charg ing station when not in use to ensure it is ready f
158. de underneath the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD Two latches must be released to open the hood 1 Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel Hood Release 2 Outside of the vehicle locate the safety latch lever near the center of the grille between the grille and hood opening Push the safety latch lever to the right and then raise the hood 031307222 Underhood Safety Latch 91 Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open position Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole on the underside of the hood 81d014ae Hood Prop Rod CAUTION To prevent possible damage e Before closing hood make sure the hood prop rod is fully seated into its storage retaining clips Continued 92 CAUTION Continued e Do not slam the hood to close it Use a firm downward push at the center front edge of the hood to ensure that both latches en gage Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches en gaged WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warn ing could result in serious injury or death LIGHTS Multifunction Lever EA The multifunction lever on the left side XT of the steerin
159. des the following components for rear seat entertainment e A diagonal 8 in 20 cm Liquid Crystal Dis play LCD screen integrated into the center overhead console The screen features brightness control for optimum daytime and nighttime viewing e The LCD Screen swings down from the con sole to allow the rear seat passenger s to view the display VES with Rear HVAC Controls e The touch screen radio and DVD player controls allow front seat operation for easy setup in the case of younger rear seat pas sengers e A battery powered infrared remote control that snaps into a molded compartment in the center console e Two wireless infrared headsets allow rear seat passengers to listen to the same or individual audio sources Audio Video RCA Jacks AUX Jacks on the rear of the center console en able the monitor to dis play video directly from a video camera con nect video games for display on the screen or play music directly from an MP3 player Video in yellow 2 Left audio in white 3 Right audio in red NOTE Refer to your Video Entertainment System VES User Manual for detailed operating instructions UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE UCI IF EQUIPPED NOTE This section is for sales code RES REL and REQ RET radios only with uconnect For sales code RBZ REN REZ touch screen ra dio and REU REX RE1 radio refer to the separate User s Manual This feature allo
160. e f working on or near a roadway be ex tremely careful of motor traffic e To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground e Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher Jack Warning Label 1 Remove the spare tire jack and jack handle from stowage 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel nuts on the wheel with the flat tire Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 3 Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to the flat tire Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange 060508794 Rear Jacking Location 215 4 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise with the jack handle Raise the ve hicle until the tire just clears the road surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 5 Remove the wheel nuts For vehicles so equipped remove the wheel cover from the wheel by hand Do not pry the wheel cover off Then pull the wheel off the hub WARNING To avoid possible personal injury handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact wit
161. e that may cause undesired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm VSA system moni tors the vehicle doors hood and liftgate for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthorized operation If something triggers the alarm the system will prevent the vehicle from starting sound the horn intermittently flash the headlights and taillights and flash the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster Rearming of the System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the system will turn off the horn after approximately 30 seconds turn off all of the visual signals after one minute and then the system will rearm itself To Arm the System 1 Remove the key from the ignition switch and exit the vehicle 2 Lock the doors and liftgate by pressing the power door lock switch or the lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter NOTE The system will not arm if you lock the doors with the manual door lock plungers or the door lock cylinder on the driver s door 3 Close all doors The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to signal that the system is arming During this period opening any door or the liftgate will cancel the arming process If the system arms successfully the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate the alarm is set NOTE For added security wh
162. e vehicle and never adjusted while the ve hicle is in motion Always adjust the head restraints when the vehicle is in PARK Continued WARNING Continued e Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of an accident and could result in serious injury or death Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are struck by an object such as a hand foot or loose cargo To avoid acci dental deployment of the Active Head Re straint ensure that all cargo is secured as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is de ployed Heated Seats If Equipped The driver and front passenger seats are heated The heaters provide the same heat level for both cushion and seatback The con 85 trols for each heater are located in the switch bank in the center of the instrument panel After turning ON the ignition you can choose from High Low or Off heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for high one for low and none for off al If High level heating is selected the system automatically switches to Low level heating and turns one indicator light off af
163. e you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the uconnect phone e Press the e button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the uconnect phone e Press the amp button e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The uconnect phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your cellular phone to the uconnect phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your uconnect phone paired cellular phone to the uconnect phone or vice versa press the M button and m a say Transfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the uconnect phone and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a uconnect phone paired cellular phone and the uconnect phone follow the instructions de scribed in your cellular phone User s Manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the S button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted say List Phones e The uconnect phone will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from t
164. e INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES e INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 5 3 cee ces oe comes e INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS e COMPASS MINI TRIP COMPUTER CMTC IF EQUIPPED aa ER ERE a SN SUIS ENTRE e CMTC Reset Buttons c seca Sc aie soe ss Gog R S Compass Temperature Display e ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC HEQUIP LED e Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays Oil Change Required If Equipped e Trip FUNCIONS ra once a o Compass Display zs cme cs ela e ao o Ea e Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features SOUND SYSTEMS oa ese ee tee eee 118 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 81d40f4b 1 Side Window Demist Outlet 5 Hazard Switch 9 Climate Control 2 Air Outlet 6 Switch Bank 10 Radio 3 Instrument Cluster 7 Beverage Cooler Storage Compartment 11 Ignition Switch 4 Storage Compartment or Remote Display Panel 8 Glove Box f Equipped 120 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER gt E k 0 ces NT c DN ze 19F WASH 81e8cd25 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Coolant Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge indicates engine cool ant temperature Any reading within the normal range indicates that the cooling system is op erating satisfactorily The gauge pointer
165. e Warning 128 Bulb Replacement 251 CalgO Sd iue oe Rx denn 95 Cruise coa eek c 126 Dimmer Switch Headlight 92 94 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator TENETE 128 179 180 Electronic Throttle Control Warning 125 O coin ase II 52 FOO 3 xx zheE xus 94 123 252 Hazard Warning Flasher 211 Headlight Leveling 93 Headlight Switch 92 Headlights sss 92 251 Headlights On Reminder 93 High Beam 94 123 251 High Beam Indicator 123 High Beam Low Beam Select 94 Illuminated Entry 15 Instrument Cluster 92 122 Intensity Control 95 IDtetlOF eua ens dee ou y eda alee qs 95 LICENSE CC 255 Lights On Reminder 93 Low Fuel xxm 122 123 LOW Tie ox e don Ree RAE i 126 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 127 Oil Pressure 125 A Ss ene m 92 251 Passing ise medo eue ap dug ed 94 Rear FOG xxx E eed 130 252 Rear Servicing 251 253 Rear Tail scort a ros 253 Seat Belt Reminder 123 Service iu x sonis d s dna 250 251 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 127 Side Marker 251 Side Repeater 253 Tire Pressure Monitoring TEMS isis Jah Ande Be 126 187 Traction Control 127 179 180 Turn Signal 52 92 94 123 251 253 Vanity Mirror 2 i a ad a aa 61 Warning Instru
166. e center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored uconnect phone book entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The uconnect M phone will then send the corresponding phone num ber associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations this is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command imme diately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the ih button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts On Off Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the uconnect phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the to button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Set
167. e of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror NOTE The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear and especially of the lane next to your vehicle 59 WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the pas senger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death 1 Mirror Direction Switch 2 Right Mirror Select 3 Left Mirror Select Power Mirrors The power mirror switch is located on the driver s door trim panel 60 Models without Express Window Feature Press the mirror select button marked L left or R right and then press one of the four arrow buttons to move the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing Models with Express Window Feature Press and release the mirror select button marked L left or R right and then press one of the four arrow buttons to move the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing The selec tion times out after 30 seconds of inactivity in order to guard against accidentally changing a mirror position following an adjustment Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature Mode
168. e oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi tion NOTE e If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indi cator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure e Performing reset procedure Steps 1 through 3 allows for a 12 000 km service interval for engine oil and filter changes Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy e Distance To Empty e Elapsed Time e Units In Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following information 135 e Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset e Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average f
169. e seat is folded flat it is an extension of the load floor surface allowing long cargo to fit from the rear hatch up to the instrument panel The fold flat seatback also has a hardback surface that you can use as a work surface when the seat is folded flat and the vehicle is not in motion Pull upward on the lever to fold or unfold the seat Fold Flat Seat Pull upward on the lever to fold or unfold the seat Seatback Release WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked 83 Power Seat If Equipped The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat near the floor Use this switch to move the seat up down forward rearward or to tilt the seat CU em 8 100199 Power Seat Switch CAUTION DO NOT place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path 84 WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be adjusted properly and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked Adjusting Active Head Restraints Active Head Restraints can reduce the risk of injury i
170. e size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result e After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres sure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could dam age the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace nor mal tire care and maintenance or to pro vide warning of a tire failure or condition 188 e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the t
171. e vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically and the TPMS Telltale Light will turn off as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information TPMS Deactivation and Reactivation The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel and tire assemblies road tires with wheel and tire assemblies that do not have TPMS Sensors such as when installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle To deactivate the TPMS first replace all four wheel and tire assemblies road tires with those not equipped with TPM Sensors Then drive the vehicle for at least 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h The TPMS will chime and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid Upon the next ignition switch cycle the TPMS will no longer chime or turn on the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light To reactivate the TPMS first replace all four wheel and tire assemblies road tires with those equipped with TPM Sensors Then drive 189 the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h The TPMS will chime and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless t
172. eak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level conditions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is necessary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Elec tronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is re quired Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approximately two sec onds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in t
173. ealer 266 90 000 Miles 144 000 km or 144 Months Maintenance Service Schedule OCOC C O C O C O Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tt Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 2 4L Engine Inspect and replace the PCV valve if necessaryt Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals and replace if necessary Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 97 500 Miles 156 000 km or 156 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter t J Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 267 OCOC O C O C O 105 000 Miles 168 000 km or 168 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tF Rotate tires If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Flush and replace the engine coolant Replace the timing belt 2 4L E
174. ears FLASH LAMP WITH LOCK When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears HEADLAMP OFF DELAY When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds after turning the ignition to the LOCK position To make your selection press and release the RESET button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears 139 KEY OFF POWER DELAY When this feature is selected the power win dow switches radio hands free system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and ignition pow ered outlets will remain active for up to 10 min utes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the RESET button until Off 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears ILLUMIN APPROACH When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selection press and hold the RESET button until Off 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears DISPLAY UNITS IN The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure
175. echnology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following compo nents e Receiver module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Three Trigger modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells 190 e Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale e Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing 81826bed Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with low pressure those flashing in the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the EVIC will
176. ecommended brake fluids MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent Power steonng Reservoir licensed ATF 4 product 258 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for sched uled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Re quired will be displayed in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary The oil change indicator message will illumi nate approximately 7 000 miles 11 200 km after the most recent oil change was per 260 formed Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within 500 miles 800 km However an earlier oil change at 3 000 miles 5 000 km may be required if the vehicle is operated under Severe Duty Conditions later in this section NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicle s oil if it has been six months since your last oil change and even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an ex tended period of time e Under no circumstance
177. ectrical Power Outle Electronic Brake Control System 176 n Anti Lock Brake System 175 Brake Assist System 177 Electronic Roll Mitigation 178 Electronic Stability Program 178 Traction Control System 178 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 178 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 0 98 Electronic Stability Program ESP 128 178 Electronic Throttle Control Warning A hun m ani un i e a 125 Electronic Vehicle Information Center VIC rua e drum s ete 100 133 Emergenoy In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 219 Hazard Warning Flasher 211 JACKIA te des o qne BE ELE 212 Jump Starting 217 Overheating 0 211 TOWING sois osi BRM ee a a 221 ENGINE vecs an ges ted 50 225 226 227 Air Cleaner o o 231 Break In Recommendations 50 Checking Oil Level 229 Compartment 225 Coolant Antifreeze 237 257 CODING sa enirn AREA Be Bed 237 Exhaust Gas Caution 25 51 Fails to Start 3s 4 Gye ad aa heen 163 Flooded Starting 163 Fuel Requirements 192 Jump Starting 217 Oil nice as o deed Ra 229 256 257 Oil Change Interval 124 135 230 Oil Filler Cap 225 226 227 230 231 OUI a Ls ddan are ds 231 Oil Filter Disposal 231 Oil Selection 230 256 Oil Synthetic 231 Operation
178. ed The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering whee and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible based on the colli Sion type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passen ger The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Side Seat Airbag
179. eded 1 GVWR 2 GTW 3 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch GAWR utilized Towing Requirements Tires Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire Proper tire inflation pressures are essential for the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Infor mation in this section for proper tire inflation procedures Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Information in this section for the proper tire inspection procedures When replacing tires refer to Tires Gen eral Information in this section for proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicles GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake sys tem or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inad equate braking and possible personal injury When towing a trailer equipped with a hy draulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 450 kg and required for trailers in excess of 1 653 Ibs 750 kg CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 450 kg loaded it should h
180. ee your authorized dealer for ser vice as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required In this case you may experience reduced perfor mance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing Also have the system checked by an autho rized dealer if the light does not turn on during starting 17 Oil Pressure Warning Light Qu This light shows low engine oil pres sure The light will turn on and remain on when the ignition switch is turned from the LOCK or ACC position to the ON position The light will turn off after the engine is started If the light does not turn on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If the light turns on and remains on while driving safely bring the vehicle to a stop and shut off the engine DO NOT OPERATE THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED This light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine The engine oil level must be checked using the proper procedure Refer to Check ing Oil Level under Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 for more information 18 Charging System Warning Light This light shows the status of the elec trical charging system The light should turn on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or turns on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s electrical devices such as the
181. eel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or exces sive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MO PAR or equivalent is recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the follow ing manner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or equivalent to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections in the windshield Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesirable reflec tions Use soap and warm water to rest
182. eeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle e Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water e Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects CAUTION Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle s drivetrain compo nents Always inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty e Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the en gine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 172 WARNING Driving through standing water limits your vehicle s traction capabilities Do not ex ceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehicle s braking capabilities which in creases stopping distances Therefore af ter driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes e Getting water inside y
183. eering wheel po sition e Under steer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel po sition ESP TCS Indicator Light The ESP TCS Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The ESP TCS In dicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions WARNING The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ESP cannot prevent ac cidents including those resulting from exces sive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe atten tive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ESP Operating Modes The ESP system has two available operating modes Full On This is the normal operating mode for ESP Whenever the vehicle is started the system will be in this mode This mode should be used for most driving situations ESP should only be turned to Partial Off for specific reaso
184. egories for Service Fill Oils use engine oils meeting the requirements of ACEA C3 and approved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 SAE 5W 30 engine oil approved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 may be used when SAE 5W 20 engine oil is not available Engine Oi ACEA Ca 2 0L Diesel Engine tegories Use only synthetic SAE 5W 30 SAE 0W 40 SAE 5W 40 SAE 10W 40 or SAE 15W 40 engine oil meeting the requirements of ACEA C3 and approved to VW 507 00 Engine Oi Filter 2 4L and 2 7L Engines MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Engine Oi Filter 2 0L Diesel Engine MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs 2 4L Engine ZFR5F 11 Gap 044 in 1 12 mm Spark Plugs 2 7L Engine RE14PMC5 Gap 050 in 1 27 mm Fuel Selection 2 4L and 2 7L Engines 91 Octane Fuel Selection 2 0L Diesel Engine 50 Cetane or higher Less than 15 ppm Sulfur 257 Chassis Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Automatic Transaxle Gasoline MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Seal Automatic Transaxle MPS6 Castrol BOT 341 or equivalent Manual Transaxle If Equipped MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product MOPAR DOT 3 SAE J1703 or equivalent should be used If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available Brake Clutch Master Cylinder then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only r
185. elect Time Setup and then press and release the joystick 4 Turn the knob surrounding the joystick to scroll to Daylight Savings and then press and release the joystick 5 If the desired setting has a check mark next to it proceed to the next step Otherwise turn 141 the knob surrounding the joystick to select Off or On and then press and release the joy stick A check mark will display next to the selection 6 Press and release the SETUP button to exit the screen Setting the User Clock If you wish to set the clock to a time different from the system clock you can manually adjust the time by performing the following NOTE You can skip Steps 2 and 3 by pressing and holding the TIME button on the radio for three seconds 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Press and release the SETUP button on the radio 3 If Time Setup is highlighted on the menu press and release the joystick in the center of the radio Otherwise turn the knob surrounding the joystick to select Time Setup and then press and release the joystick 142 4 If User Time has a check mark next to it proceed to the next step Otherwise turn the knob surrounding the joystick to scroll to User Time and then press and release the joystick 5 Turn the knob surrounding the joystick to select Set Hours and then press and release the joystick 6 Turn the knob surrounding the
186. emperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The luid should only be checked if a leak is sus pected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as anticipated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can dam age your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accu rate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturers recommended power steering fluid f necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Section 7 for the correct fluid type PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied Also be certain to leave an automatic transaxle in PARK or manual transaxle in REVERSE or first gear 173 Manual Transaxle If Equipped The parking brake lever is located in the center console To apply the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as po
187. ended high engine rpm operation Reset Mode Electronic Transaxle The transaxle is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could cause damage the transaxle auto matically shifts into second gear third gear for six speed The transaxle remains in second gear third gear for six speed despite the 169 forward gear selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to operate This Reset feature allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transaxle In the event of a momentary problem the transaxle can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Shift into PARK 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi tion 4 Restart the engine 5 Shift into the desired gear range and resume driving NOTE Even if the transaxle can be reset it is recommended that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible conve nience Your authorized dealer has diagnos tic equipment to determine if the problem could recur 170 If the transaxle cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required AUTOSTICK IF EQUIPPED AutoStick is a driver interactive transaxle that offers six manual ratio changes to provide you with more control of the vehicle AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking elimi nate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve
188. enever the Security Alarm is armed the HomeLink Garage Door Opener if equipped is disabled as well To Disarm the System Either press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position NOTE e Unlocking the doors with the manual door lock plungers or the door lock cylinder on the driver s door will not disarm the sys tem e When the system is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors The Security Alarm system is designed to pro tect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If the previously described arming sequence has occurred the system will arm regardless of whether you are inside or outside the vehicle If you remain inside the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the system ILLUMINATED ENTRY The interior lights will turn on when you press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or open a door or the liftgate This feature also turns on the approach lighting if equipped Refer to Illumin Approach un 15 der Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 The interior lights will fade to off after approxi mately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switc
189. er Automatic Door Locks Programming The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in Section 4 20 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition switch 2 Within 15 seconds cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK posi tion do not start the engine 3 Within 30 seconds depress the power door LOCK switch to lock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE e If you do not hear the chime it means that the system did not enter the programming mode and you will need to repeat the procedure e Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accordance with local laws Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit If Auto Unlock is enabled this feature will unlock all the doors when the driver s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped and in PARK or NEUTRAL Refer to Auto Unlock on Exit under the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in section 4 of this manual or see your authorized dealer The doors will u
190. er allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passen ger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to information on Child Restraints in this section You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly All occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and shoulder belts properly The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Airbags room to inflate Do not lean against the door If your vehicle has side airbags and deployment occurs the side airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 35 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance in Section 9 of this manual WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags e Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during front airbag de ployment could cause serious injury in cluding death Airbags need room to i
191. er and all passengers The System automatically adjusts the air tempera ture the airflow volume amount of outside air recirculation and the airflow direction This maintains a comfortable temperature even un der changing conditions 150 81eb75c6 Two Zone ATC 1 System On Off 2 Left Front Temperature 3 Display Screen 4 Right Front Temperature 5 Air Conditioning A C On Off 6 RECIRCULATE 7 Front MODE 8 Electric Rear Win dow Defroster Button 9 Front DEFROST 10 Front Blower Speed 11 AUTO Mode Blower 81f4d61d Three Zone ATC 1 System On Off 2 Left Front Temperature 3 Display Screen 4 Right Front Temperature 5 Air Conditioning A C On Off 6 AUTO Mode Blower 7 Front MODE 8 RECIRCULATE 9 Front DEFROST 10 Front Blower Speed 11 SYNC CREAR x i 81dc95d4 Three Zone ATC Lower Control Panel 1 Rear Blower Speed 4 Rear ATC Lock 2 Rear Temperature 5 Rear DEFROST Rear System On Off 3 Rear MODE Automatic Operation 1 Press the AUTO button on the Front Upper ATC Panel and the word AUTO will illuminate in the front ATC display along with three tempera tures for driver front passenger and rear seats The system will then automatically regulate the amount of airflow 2 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain
192. er be less than 4 of the trailer load and not less than 55 Ibs 25 kg You must consider tongue load as part of the load on your vehicle and its GAWR WARNING An improperly adjusted hitch system may reduce handling stability and braking perfor mance and could result in an accident Con sult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable trailer dealer for additional infor mation Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control Refer to TSC Trailer Sway Control under Electronic Brake Control System in this sec tion for information on this system Breakaway Cable Attachment European braking regulations for braked trail ers up to 7 700 Ibs 3 500 kg require trailers to be fitted with either a secondary coupling or breakaway cable The recommended location for attaching the normal trailers breakaway cable is in the stamped slot located on the sidewall of the hitch receiver 199 With Attachment Point e For detachable tow bar pass the cable through the attachment point and clip it back onto itself e For fixed ball tow bar loop the cable around the neck of the tow ball If you fit the cable like this use a single loop only 818e675d Fixed Ball Clip Loop Method Without Attachment Points e For detachable ball tow bar you must follow the recommended manufacturer or supplier 3 procedure Fixed Ball
193. er in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your trailer hitch Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard located on the face of the driver s door or on the driver s side B pillar for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle 201 Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended CAUTION e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may damage your vehicle e During the first 500 miles 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h Perform the maintenance listed in the Mainte nance Schedule When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR r
194. er the costs of repairing damage or conditions caused by any changes to your vehicle that do not comply with the manufacturers specifications Original Mopar parts and accessories and other products approved by the manufacturer including qualified advice are available at your authorized dealer When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained technicians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satis faction Copyright 2009 Chrysler International HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you de sire The detailed Index at the back of this manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual E OG Ro y E ag 1 ELECTRONIC STABILITY WATER IN FUEL REARWINDOW WINDSHIELD WIPER EXTERIOR BULB TURN SIGNALS UPPER AIR HEATED SEAT DOOR LOCK ELECTRONIC PROGRAM WIPER INTERMITTENT FAILURE LOW SPEED CONTROL ASSIST SYSTEM BRAKE Cs gt a e PIN ae Z0 e I BRAKE SYSTEM WINDSHIELD MASTER LIGHTING LOW BEAM KEY ACTIVATE UPPER AND LOWER un md TIRE PRESSURE HILLDESCENT WARNING PARKING WASHER SWITCH POWER OUTLET AIR OUTLET MONITOR CONTROL BRAKE ort EY FUEL FILL SIDE REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD WASHER DOME LIGHT FRONT FOG LIGHT HOO
195. erent lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive mate rial to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use cau tion when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with an electric defroster Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements 245 When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning u
196. ers from loose cargo The removable retractable cargo area cover mounts in the cargo area behind the top of the rear seats The cover when extended covers the cargo area to keep items out of sight Notches in the trim panels near the liftgate opening secure the extended cover in place The cover rolls away neatly inside its housing when not in use You can also remove the cover from the vehicle to make more room in the cargo area 111 To install the cover position it in the vehicle so that the flat side of the housing faces upward Then insert either the left or the right spring loaded post located on the ends of the cover housing into the left attachment point or the right attachment point shown Installing Retractable Cargo Area Cover Insert the spring loaded post on the opposite end of the cover housing into the attachment point on the opposite side of the vehicle Grab the cover handle and pull it toward you As the cover nears the liftgate opening guide the rear attachment posts on both ends of the cover into the notches in the trim panels 112 Lower the cover to position the posts into the bottom of the notches and release the handle Positioning Retractable Cargo Area Cover WARNING Acargo cover that is unsecured in the vehicle could cause injury in an accident It could become airborne during a sudden stop and strike someone inside the vehicle Do not store the cargo cover on the ca
197. ervice is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the Brake System Warning Light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti Lock brakes Furthermore the ABS light should be checked frequently to assure that it is operating properly If the light does not turn on have the system checked by an authorized dealer Refer to Anti Lock Brake System ABS under Electronic Brake Control System in Section 5 for more informa tion 23 Electronic Stability Program ESP Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light If this indicator light flashes during acceleration ease up on the ac celerator and apply as little throttle as possible Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Section 5 for more information 24 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Hs is part of an onboard diagnostic sys tem called OBD that monitors en gine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the MIL after engine start The vehicle shoul
198. es skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area immediately with large amounts of water e Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the bat tery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Continued 232 WARNING Continued e Battery posts terminals and related acces sories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling CAUTION e Itis essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is at tached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive and negative and identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion e Ifa fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage as bat tery damage can result Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air condi tioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should al
199. flated tires can af fect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure WARNING e Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents e Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result over heating and in tire failure Continued Economy mproper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and un comfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condi tion These pressure conditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a mont
200. four wheel disc brakes O O O D Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer T This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions warranty WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic 271 Maintenance Schedule 2 7L Gasoline Engine Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals Severe Duty Conditions Tt Change the engine oil and engine oil filter at every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months if using your vehicle under any of the following severe duty conditions e Stop and go driving e Driving in dusty conditions e Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 km e Trailer towing e Taxi police or delivery service commercial service e Off road or desert operation 272 7 500 Miles 12 000 km or 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter t J Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Deale
201. g column controls the I operation of the headlights position lights turn signal lights instrument panel lights instrument panel light dimming interior lights and fog lights if equipped 031407684 Multifunction Lever Headlights and Position Lights Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent for position light operation Turn the end of the lever to the second detent for headlight operation 031407605 Headlight Switch Headlight Time Delay This feature is particularly useful when exiting your vehicle in an unlit area It provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 sec onds after turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position To activate the delay turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position while the headlights are still on Then turn off the headlights within 45 sec onds The delay interval begins when you turn off the headlights Only the headlights will illu minate during this time If you turn the headlights or parking lights or ignition switch ON again the system will cancel the delay If you turn the headlights off before the ignition they will turn off in the normal manner The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles equipped with the EVIC Refer to Headlight Off Delay under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 Lights On Reminder If the headl
202. g com mands e Radio to switch to the radio mode e Disc to switch to the disc mode e Memo to switch to the memo recorder e System Setup to switch to system setup Radio AM or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium Wave If Equipped To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM In this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station 80 e Previous Station to select the previous station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Radio FM To switch to the FM band say FM or Radio FM In this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Disc To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you may say the following commands e Track to change the track e Next Track to play the next track e Previous Track to play the previous track e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In this mode you may say the follow ing commands e New Memo to record a new memo During the recording you may press the Te but
203. g procedure Engine Oil Checking Oil Level Gasoline Engines To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and only when the engine is hot will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the range mark ings on the dipstick Either the range markings consist of a crosshatch zone marked SAFE or a crosshatch zone marked with MIN at the low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the range Adding 1 0 qt 1 0 I of oil when the reading is at the low end of the range marking will raise the oil level to the high end of the range marking CAUTION Do not overfill the engine Overfilling the en gine will cause oil aeration which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature This could damage your engine Checking Oil Level 2 0L Diesel Engine To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to
204. g severe or evasive driving maneuvers It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other ve hicles WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road conditions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other ve hicles Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be ex ploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Stability Program ESP This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESP corrects for over steering and under steering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle main tain the desired path The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to deter mine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path the ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of over steer or under steer e Over steer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the st
205. g that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cellular phone Press the button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The uconnect phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only an swer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call While Current Call in Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the TM button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phone book entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls To combine two calls refer to Conference Call 67 Place Retrieve a Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the to button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one
206. g up to 15 seconds with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the key fob once the engine is running smoothly If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accel erator pedal held to the floor repeat the Nor mal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather pro cedures With Tip Start If the engine fails to start after you have fol lowed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather procedures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Then turn the ignition switch to the START position 163 and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up Normal Starting Diesel Engine 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position 2 Watch for the Wait To Start Indicator Light in the instrument cluster Refer to Section 4 It will illuminate for two to ten seconds or more depending on engine temperature When the Wait To Start Indicator Light goes out
207. gnal another vehicle with your head lights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released NOTE If the multifunction lever is held in the flash to pass position for more than 15 seconds the high beams will shut off If this occurs wait 30 seconds before activating the flash to pass function again Instrument Panel Dimmer Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme bottom position to fully dim the instru ment panel lights and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is opened Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights when the parking lights or headlights are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next detent position to brighten the odom eter and radio when the parking lights or head lights are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last detent to turn on the interior lighting NOTE The Battery Saver feature will not activate until the ignition switch is in the LOCK position Refer to Battery Saver Feature for additional information 031407685 Dimmer Control Courtesy Reading Lights Models with Overhead Console These lights are mounted in the overhead con sole between the sun visors They are also located in the headliner above the second row passenger seats Press and release the lens to turn on
208. h Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem nflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be in creased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation
209. h any sharp edges 216 NOTE For vehicles so equipped the wheel cover is held on the wheel by the wheel nuts When reinstalling the original wheel properly align the wheel cover to the valve stem place the wheel cover onto the wheel and then install the wheel nuts 6 Install the spare tire NOTE e For vehicles so equipped do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare e Refer to Compact Spare Tire and to Limited Use Spare under Tires Gen eral Information in Section 5 for addi tional warnings cautions and informa tion about the spare tire its use and operation 7 Install the wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the wheel nuts WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury or death 8 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counterclockwise with the jack handle 9 Finish tightening the wheel nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate wheel nuts until each nut has been tightened twice The correct wheel nut tightness is 95 ft Ibs 130 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your autho rized dealer or at a service station 10 Lower the jack to its fully c
210. h is turned ON NOTE The illuminated entry system will not oper ate the interior lights if the Dimmer Control is in the extreme downward Defeat posi tion REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate from distances up to about 35 ft 11 m using a hand held radio transmitter The transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE Inserting the Key Fob into the ignition switch disables all buttons on that transmit ter however the buttons on the remaining transmitters will continue to work Driving at 16 speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables all transmitter buttons for all Key Fobs 020207435 Remote Keyless Entry RKE Transmitter To Unlock the Doors and Liftgate Press and release the unlock button on the transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors First This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the unlock button on the transmitter To change the current setting pro ceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to RKE Unlock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea
211. he ACEA Categories listed under Engine Oil Se lection SAE 5W 30 SAE OW 40 SAE 5W 40 SAE 10W 40 or SAE 15W 40 Synthetic Engine Oils Gasoline Engines You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oil Do not add any supplemental materials other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemen tal additives Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturers engines have a full flow type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
212. he ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 27 Airbag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to six seconds as a bulb check when the ry ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is either not on during starting or stays on or turns on while driving then have the system inspected at your authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Section 2 for more information 28 Compass Temperature Display Button If Equipped Operates the Compass Temperature display in the Compass Mini Trip Computer CMTC dis play 129 29 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Compass Mini Trip Computer CMTC Display If Equipped On vehicles equipped with a Premium Cluster this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC messages when the ap propriate conditions exist Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in this sec tion for more information On vehicles equipped with a Mid Line Cluster this display shows the compass heading N S E W NE NW SE and SW and the outside temperature The COMPASS TEMPERATURE DISPLAY button operates this display Press and release the button once to turn on the display Press and release it again to turn off the display Refer to Compass Mini Trip Computer CMTC in this section for more information 130 3
213. he child seat must be folded flat if the seat back can not be locked in a upright position f a child seat is to be used in the second row the first row seat directly in front of the child seat may need to be limited in its rearward travel to avoid any contact with the child seat 81057108 42 WARNING Extreme Hazard Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an airbag in front of it Refer to visor and door shut face mounted labels for informa tion In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size There are different sizes and types of restraints or children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child Infants and Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 Ibs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The
214. he correct fluid type WARNING e Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its perfor mance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir e To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed con tainer Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking resulting in sud den brake failure This could result in a accident Continued WARNING Continued Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to con taminate the brake fluid Brake seal com ponents could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in an accident Automatic Transaxle If Equipped The automatic transaxle and differential assem bly are conta
215. he highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being 71 announced press the button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or delete a paired phone Select Another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the uconnect phone e Press the tO button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts You can also press the wh button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the uconnect phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle 72 Delete uconnect phone Paired Cellular Phones e Press the to button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the 4 button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your uconnect phone uconnect phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the uconnect phone features press the o button and say uconnect Tutorial Voice T
216. he to button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts e You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your cellular phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process 63 e For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the uconnect phone a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name e You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between 1 and 7 with 1 being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your uconnect phone However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your uconnect phone The priority allows the uconnect phone to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in the vehicle the uconnect phone will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Ad vanced Phone Connectivity Dial by Saying a Number e Press the o button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say
217. his light remains on after several ignition switch cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than ESP BAS 180 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diag nosed and corrected NOTE e The ESP TCS Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light will turn on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition switch is turned ON the ESP System will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESP Control System will make buzz ing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the ma neuver that caused the ESP activation Hill Start Assist HSA If Equipped The HSA system is designed to help the driver accelerate the vehicle from a complete stop while on an incline If the driver releases the brake while stopped on an incline HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a short period If the driver does not apply the throttle before this time expires the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal The system will release brake pressure in proportion to amount of throttle applied The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to activate e The vehicle must be stopped e The vehicle must be on a 2 5 or greater incline e The gear selection mu
218. hrown 50 about and possibly injured or injure a passen ger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 mi 500 km After the initial 60 mi 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle accel eration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consis tent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of opera tion This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indi cation of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
219. ht The light should turn on and remain on for four to six seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting or if the light stays on flickers or turns on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer 52 Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper able Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside the Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exte rior lights while you work the controls Check Turn Signal and High Beam Indicator Lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and lock ing Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight park ing for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately e Things You Should Know About Your uconnect phone a E
220. ie down the load Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains securely attached CAUTION e Cross rails should remain equally spaced or parallel at any luggage rack position for proper function Noncompliance could re sult in damage to the roof rack cargo and vehicle e To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 Ibs 68 kg Always distribute loads as evenly as pos sible and secure the load appropriately Continued CAUTION Continued e Long loads which extend over the wind shield such as wood panels or surfboards or loads with large frontal area should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle e Place a blanket or other protection between the surface of the roof and the load e Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack Wind forces due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward lift to loads This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle WARNING Cargo must be securely tied before driving your vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in personal injury or property dam age Follow the Roof Rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack 115 116 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
221. ight Rear Posi tion Side Marker Lights and Rear Registration Plate Illumination Device Brown Stoplights Red Left Rear Position Side Marker Lights and Rear Registration Plate Illumination Device Black 81789d61 Thirteen Pin Connector The rear position registration plate illumina tion device shall be connected such that no light of the device has a common connection with both pins 5 and 7 Pin Function Wire Color Number 1 Left Turn Signal Yellow 2 Rear Fog Light Blue 3 Ground Common White Return for Con tacts Pins 1 and 2 and 4 to 8 4 Right Turn Signal Green Pin Function Wire Color Pin Function Wire Color Number Number 5 Right Rear Posi Brown 13 Return for Contact White tion Side Marker Pin 9 Lights and Rear Note The allocation pin 12 has been Registration Plate changed from Coding for coupled Trailer to Illumination Reserve for Future Allocation Device The three return circuits shall not be con 6 Stoplights Red nected electrically in the trailer 7 Left Rear Position Black The rear position registration plate illumina Side Marker tion device shall be connected such that no Lights and Rear light of the device has a common connection Registration Plate with both pins 5 and 7 ser Towing Tips l l l 3 Reverse lights Red Black Before setting out on a trip practi
222. ight if necessary NOTE When installing a child restraint if it inter feres with the Head Restraint recline the seatback slightly to remove the interference To attach a child restraint tether strap e Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat preferably between the head restraint posts underneath the head re straint 81ec00b9 Tether Strap Mounting e f necessary move the seat forward to pro vide better access to the tether anchor Seat Track Release Lever 49 e Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the tether anchor and remove slack in the tether strap according to the child re straint manufacturer s instructions NOTE Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap WARNING e Child Restraint Anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle e An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be t
223. ights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned to the LOCK position a continuous chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Headlight Leveling System If Equipped This system allows the driver to maintain proper headlight beam position with the road surface regardless of vehicle load 0 The headlight leveling switch is 1 located in the switch bank in the 2 Z center of the instrument panel 3 To operate push the headlight leveling switch until the appropriate number which corre sponds to the load listed on the following chart illuminates on the switch 0 Driver only or driver and front pas senger 1 All seating positions occupied 2 All seating positions occupied plus an evenly distributed load in the lug gage compartment The total weight of passengers and load does not exceed the maximum load capacity of the vehicle 3 Driver plus an evenly distributed load in the luggage compartment The total weight of the driver and load does not exceed the maximum load capacity of the vehicle Calculations based on a passenger weight of 165 Ibs 75 kg 93 Fog Lights If Equipped To activate the front fog lights turn on FO the parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull out the end of the multifunction lever 031407687 Front Fog Light Control NOTE The front fog lights will only operate when the position lights or the low
224. igni tion switch is in the LOCK position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to the ON or START position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed BTSI Override There is an override for the BTSI that allows you to move the shift lever out of the PARK position if an electrical system malfunction occurs i e dead battery To activate the override system perform the following steps 1 Firmly apply the parking brake 2 Insert the key fob into the ignition switch and turn it to the ON position 3 Remove the cubby bin liner located in the center console behind the shift lever 4 nsert a screwdriver or similar small tool into the hole at the front of the cubby bin and push the manual override release lever forward 5 While holding the release lever forward move the shift lever from PARK to NEUTRAL 6 Release the manual override Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System This system prevents the key fob from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the ignition Switch is in the ON position and the brake pedal is applied 167 Four Speed or Six Speed AutoStick Automatic Transaxle The electronically controlled transaxle provides a precise shift schedule The transaxle elec tronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a nor
225. il and engine oil filter tt J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary 1 Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary 1 Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped 1 Inspect the CV joints 1 Inspect the exhaust system 1 Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals and replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 264 52 500 Miles 84 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter t J Rotate tires 1 Change the manual transaxle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 60 000 Miles 96 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a O O O O C D Change the engine oil and engine oil filter j Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 2 4L Engine Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Change
226. ild could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufac turer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint e A rearward facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards We also recommend that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits e Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it e Buckle the child into the seat according to he child restraint manufacturer s directions e When your child restraint is not in use se cure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it oose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal in ury 45 LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Your vehicle s second row passe
227. ile using the D Overdrive range such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions i e in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers Under these con ditions using the 3 range will improve perfor mance and extend transaxle life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up 3 Drive Four Speed Transaxle This range eliminates shifts into D Over drive The transaxle will operate normally in first second and third gear while in this range The 3 Drive range should also be used when descending steep grades to prevent brake system distress NOTE Using the 3 Drive range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating condi tions will improve performance and extend transaxle life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up L Low Four Speed Transaxle This range should be used for engine braking when descending very steep grades In this range upshifts will occur only to prevent en gine overspeed while downshifts occur earlier than other gear range selections CAUTION If the transaxle operating temperature ex ceeds the acceptable limits the vehicle com puter will override D Overdrive by changing shift points also 3 range for four speed This is done to prevent transaxle damage due to overheating If the operating temperature continues to rise AutoStick function will be modified to prevent ext
228. in order for the TPMS to receive this information TPMS Deactivation amp Reactivation The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel and tire assemblies road tires with wheel and tire assemblies that do not have TPMS Sensors such as when installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle 191 To deactivate the TPMS first replace all four wheel and tire assemblies road tires with those not equipped with TPM Sensors Then drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h The TPMS will chime and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM text message and the graphic will display in place of four tire pressure values Upon the next ignition switch cycle the TPMS will no longer chime or turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light or display the text message in the EVIC However the graphic will still display To reactivate the TPMS first replace all four wheel and tire assemblies road tires with those equipped with TPM Sensors Then drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h The TPMS will chime the Tire Pres sure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM text message and the graphic will display tire pressure v
229. indows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sun roof open adjust the sunroof opening to mini mize the buffeting or open any window LIFTGATE The liftgate can be unlocked or locked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or by activating the power door lock switch located on either front door trim panel NOTE The liftgate cannot be unlocked or locked with the manual door lock plungers on the door trim panels or the door lock cylinder on the driver s door To open the unlocked liftgate squeeze the handle and pull the liftgate toward you Gas props will raise and support the liftgate in the open position 81cfe12d Liftgate Release NOTE Because the gas pressure drops with tem perature it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather WARNING Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle These fumes could injure you and your passengers Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle Continued WARNING Continued e If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the blower switch on the cli mate control is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems e Three point lap and shoulder belts fo
230. ined within a single housing The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced Operation with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the transaxle and the fluid 241 Fluid Level Check 2 4L and 2 7L Engines Use the following procedure to check the auto matic transaxle fluid level properly 1 Park the vehicle on level ground 2 Run the engine at curb idle speed for a minimum of 60 seconds 3 Apply the parking brake fully 4 Place the shift lever momentarily in each gear position ending with the lever in PARK 5 Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to eliminate the possibility of dirt entering the transaxle 6 Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot or cold Hot fluid is approximately 180 F 82 C which is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle is driven at least 15 miles 24 km Hot fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips Cold fluid is at a temperature below 80 F 27 C 242 7 Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated Then remove dipstick and note the reading a If the fluid is hot the reading should be in the crosshatched area marked HOT be tween the upper two holes in the dipstick b If the fluid is cold the fluid level shou be between the lower two holes in the area marked COLD f the fluid level is low add sufficient fluid through the filler dipstick tube
231. ining session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only SEATS Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Re straint System of the vehicle They need to be used properly for safe operation of the vehicle WARNING e DO NOT allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Continued WARNING Continued e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Manual Forward and Rearward Adjustments The manual seat adjustment bar is at the front of the seat near the floor Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rearward Release the bar once the seat is in the position desired Using body pressure move forward and rear ward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched Manual Seat Adjustment 81 WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be adjusted properly and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked Recliner Adjustment The control lever is on the outboard side of the seat To recli
232. ion you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is normally a re sult of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens allowing hot coolant to enter the radiator 240 If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will Soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If anti freeze needs to be added contents of cool ant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing e If frequent coolant additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling System should be pressure tested for leaks e For gasoline engines maintain coolant con centration at 50 HOAT engine coolant minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components e Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed e Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever nec essary install ONLY the correct type thermo stat Other designs m
233. ire Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following compo nents e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicles recom mended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning When a system fault is detected the Tire Pres sure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
234. is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the V button in the center of the switch and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent which operates regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually How ever the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sun roof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the per ception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof in certain open or partially open posi tions This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds 103 after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature Fo
235. issions con trol systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such ma terials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn n unusual situations involving grossly malfunc tioning engine operation a scorching odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalyst over heating If this occurs safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop shut the engine OFF and allow the vehicle to cool Thereafter obtain service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifications immediately To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage e Do not shut OFF the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle e Do not idle the engine with any ignition coil connectors disconnected for prolonged pe riods Cooling System WARNING e When working near the radiator cooling fan disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position e You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under
236. ivetrain REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL This range is used when vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with engine running Engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have an acci dent DRIVE Six Speed Transaxle This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest up shifts downshifts and best fuel economy How ever use the AutoStick mode and select the appropriate gear when frequent transaxle shift ing occurs while using the DRIVE range such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions i e in hilly terrain traveling into strong headwinds or while towing heavy trailers Under these conditions using AutoStick will improve performance and ex tend transaxle life by reducing excessive shift ing and heat build up D Overdrive Four Speed Transaxle This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest up shifts downshifts and best fuel economy How ever select the 3 range when frequent trans axle shifting occurs wh
237. joystick to set the hour highlighted on the clock on the screen Press and release the joystick when done 7 Turn the knob surrounding the joystick to select Set Minutes and then press and re lease the joystick 8 Turn the knob surrounding the joystick to set the minutes highlighted on the clock on the screen Press and release the joystick when done 9 Press and release the SETUP button to exit the screen Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the screen when the system is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting NOTE You can skip Steps 2 and 3 by pressing and holding the TIME button on the radio for three seconds 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Press and release the SETUP button on the radio 3 If Time Setup is highlighted on the menu press and release the joystick in the center of the radio Otherwise turn the knob surrounding the joystick to select Time Setup and then press and release the joystick 4 Turn the knob surrounding the joystick to scroll to Clock if Radio off and then press and release the joystick to change the current set ting A check mark will display next to Clock if Radio off when the feature is selected 5 Press and release the SETUP button to exit the screen VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM VES IF EQUIPPED The optional Video Entertainment System VES inclu
238. lating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the win dow The airbag inflates in about 30 ms about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are 38 positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to chil dren The side curtain airbag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed NOTE In a rollover the pretensioners and or SABIC airbags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle Front and Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Additional sensors in the ORC determine the level of airbag deployment and provide verification Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing airbag de ployment if the communication network re mains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off e Turn on the interior
239. ld result in e Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out the battery vent e Personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion CAUTION Any procedure other than above could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or of the immobilized vehicle FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between REVERSE and 1st gear Using the least accelerator pedal pres sure to maintain the rocking motion without Spinning the wheels is most effective NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Control turn the sys tem OFF before attempting to rock the vehicle Refer to Par tial Off Mode under Electronic Stability Program ESP in Sec tion 5 219 CAUTION e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving between 1st and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result e Rewing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheat ing and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could explode and inj
240. ld the unlock button on a programmed transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the lock button while still holding the unlock button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the lock unlock buttons on the transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the lock button on the transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the unlock button to deactivate the Security Alarm Illuminated Approach If Equipped This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the EVIC Refer to Illumin Approach under Per sonal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 To Lock the Doors and Liftgate Press and release the lock button on the trans mitter to lock all doors and liftgate The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the sig nal Express Down Window Feature This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door windows at the same time To use this feature press and relea
241. ler ORC de termines whether the severity or type of rear impact require the Active Head Restraints AHR to deploy In case of AHR deployment both driver and front passenger seat AHR s will be deployed When AHR s deploy during a rear impact the head restraint front half extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear end impacts NOTE The Active Head Restraints AHR may or may not deploy in the event of a front or side impact However if during a front impact a secondary rear impact occurs the AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the impact a LO Active Head Restraint AHR Components 3 Head Restraint Back Half Decorative 1 Head Restraint Front Half Soft Foam and Trim Plastic Rear Cover 4 Head Restraint 2 Seatback Guide Tubes CAUTION All occupants including the driver should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident NOTE For more information on properly adjusting and positioning the head restraint refer to Section 3 Adjusting Active Head Restraints Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in an accident
242. lifts should not be used Internal damage to the transaxle will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing 207 208 210 HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the instrument panel switch bank above the climate controls Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flasher This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assis tance the Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even though the ignition switch is in the LOCK position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action e On the highways Slow down e In city traffic While stopped put the transaxle in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could dam age your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H safely pull over and stop the ve hicle Idle the vehicle
243. ling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturer s world wide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the Worldwide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufac turer recommends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC specifications if they are available Methanol Methyl or Wood Alcoho concentrations when b gasoline You may find more methanol along wi cosolvents Problems is used in a variety of ended with unleaded uels containing 3 or h other alcohols called hat result from using methanol gasoline or E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While TBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol CAUTION DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Ethanol The manufacturer recommends that your ve hicle be operated on fuel containing no more than 10 ethanol Purchasing your fuel from a reputable supplier may reduce the risk of ex ceeding this 1096 limit and or of receiving fuel with abnormal properties It should also be noted that an increase in fuel consumption should be e
244. lly when the ambient tem perature is below 32 F 0 C e Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E 85 and may form deposits in your engine To eliminate driveability issues that may be caused by these deposits a supplemental gasoline additive such as MOPAR Injec tor Cleanup or Techron may be used Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 and Gasoline Vehicles FFV vehicles operated on E 85 require spe cially formulated engine oils These special requirements are included in MOPAR engine oils and in equivalent oils meeting Chrysler Specification MS 6395 The manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Stan dard MS 6395 MS 6395 contains additional requirements developed during extensive fleet testing to provide additional protection to Chrysler Group LLC engines Use MOPAR or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS 6395 Starting The characteristics of E 85 fuel make it unsuit able for use when ambient temperatures fall below O F 18 C In the range of O F 18 C to 32 F 0 C you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start and a deterioration in driveability sags and or hesita tions until the engine is fully warmed up NOTE Use of the engine block heater if equipped is beneficial for E 85 startability when the ambient temperature is less than 32 F 0 C Cr
245. losed position WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Have the deflated flat tire repaired or re placed immediately 11 Place the deflated flat tire in the cargo area Do not stow the deflated tire in the spare tire stowage location Have the de flated flat tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible 12 To stow the winch cable and retainer fit the assembled jack handle over the winch drive nut Rotate the jack handle assembly clock wise until you hear the winch mechanism click three times It cannot be over tightened 13 Stow the jack handle and jack 14 Check the tire pressure as soon as pos sible Adjust the tire pressure as required Wheel Nuts Tighten all wheel nuts occasionally to eliminate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the bolt holes in the wheels becoming elon gated This is especially important during the first few hundred miles kilometers of operation and after changing a tire This allows the wheel nuts to seat properly All wheel nuts should first be firmly seated against the wheel The wheel nuts should then be tightened to recommended torque Tighten the wheel nuts to the final torque in increments Progress around the bolt circle tightening the nut opposite of the one you previously tightened until the final torque is
246. ls Without Power Folding Feature Some models have exterior mirrors that are hinged The hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to resist damage The hinge has three detent positions forward rear ward and normal Models With Power Folding Feature The power folding mirror switch is located on driver s door trim panel Press and release the switch once to fold the mirrors Press and release the switch again to unfold the mirrors Power Folding Mirror Switch NOTE The Power Folding feature operates with the ignition switch in the LOCK ACC or ON position Heated Mirrors These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated when ever you turn on the rear window de froster Refer to Rear Window Features in this section for further information Illuminated Vanity Mirrors An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward The light will turn on automatically Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light a 81f4d169 Illuminated Vanity Mirror Sun Visor Slide On Rod Feature If Equipped This feature allows for additional flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the sun 1 Fold down the sun visor 2 Unclip the visor from the center clip 3 Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to extend it uconnect phone IF EQUIPPED NOTE For uconne
247. lter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped a a a a a a police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes D Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Change the automatic transaxle fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following 67 500 Miles 108 000 km or 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tt Rotate tires Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals and replace if necessary O O O C Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 276 75 000 Miles 120 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter t J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary 1 Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped 1 Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 105 000 mile 168 000 km 82 500 Miles 132 000 km or
248. mal condition and preci sion shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Shift Lever Gear Ranges PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transaxle The engine can be 168 started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion Apply parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range When parking on a flat surface place the shift lever in the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transaxle locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substi tute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Continued WARNING Continued e Never leave children in the vehicle alone Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons The child or others could be seriously or fatally injured They could operate the windows other vehicle controls or move the vehicle CAUTION DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL positions into another gear range as this can damage the dr
249. ment Cluster Description 122 Load Floor Cargo 110 Loading Vehicle 197 198 Capacities amp 4 s DIA ES e 198 LOCKS 32944 ue end dod d 18 AUO UNIOR s ac xx Ren 20 Automatic Door 19 Child Protection 21 DOOF iude coe s ek ae ch Ros 18 Power Door 0 19 Low Tire Pressure System 187 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH ugue R xXx 46 48 Lubrication Body 234 Luggage Rack Roof Rack 114 Lumbar Support s se s resa 82 Maintenance Free Battery 231 Maintenance General 228 Maintenance Procedures 228 Maintenance Schedule 260 261 272 282 Maintenance Sunroof 103 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 127 Manual Transaxle 162 165 243 Downshifting sss 166 Fluid Level Check 243 Frequency of Fluid Change 243 Lubricant Selection 243 Marker Lights Side 251 Master Cylinder Brakes 241 Methanol 0 193 Methanol Fuel 193 312 Mini Trip Computer Mirrors ao ak as Bw Automatic Dimming Electric Powered Electric Remote Exterior Folding Heated Outside Rearview Vanity ode Fuel Saver odifications Alterations Vehicle onitor Tire Pressure System opar Parts P3 Player ulti Function Control Lever Navigation System uconne
250. ment Panel and Controls 120 nstrument Panel Cover 245 nstrument Panel Lens Cleaning 246 ntegrated Power Module Fuses 246 nterior Appearance Care 245 nterior Lighting 92 nterior Lights oi c em 95 ntermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 97 MTOQUCI N xeu Eve ees 4 Jack Location Lcx ks 212 Jack Operation 212 215 Jacking Instructions 215 Jump Starting sn 217 Key Programming 14 Key Replacement 14 Key Sentry Immobilizer 13 Key In Reminder 13 Keyless Entry System 16 KOyS oe oe et eo a X ESOS e a 12 Knee Bolster 4 3 ate peer 32 33 Lane Change and Turn Signals 94 Lap Shoulder Belts 26 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren sss 46 48 Latch Plate cu ace ee e 27 LANES acc cada we ba bang wed 52 FHOOG jm sage Er boots a 91 Lead Free Gasoline 192 Leaks RWG uus Pee Re x 52 Leveling Headlight 93 Life of TIES i su one m Rem ee 185 Liftgate eu xod Ree BR ee E 24 Liftgate Window Wiper Washer 112 Light BUDS amp uas ke 52 250 Light Replacement 251 A PPP 52 92 251 Airbag 33 37 40 52 129 Bn EOCK o o toodang cae e e 177 Anti Lock Warning 127 BackUp isse a ae a 253 Battery Saver 95 Brake Assist Warning 128 180 Brak
251. method is shown in the following diagram E E ca Y 055707139 Tire Rotation TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pres sure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to the Tires General Informa tion in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pres sure will also increase as the vehicle is driven This is normal and there should be no adjust ment for this increased pressure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason in cluding low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recomme
252. n Use Lower Anchorage Loops A and B If placing a second child seat in the vehicle use the Outer 4096 Seating Position and Lower Anchorage Loops D and E DO NOT USE Middle 60 Seating Posi tion and Lower Anchorage Loops B and C 2 Middle 60 6 Seating Position Use Lower Anchorage Loops B and C If placing a second child seat in the vehicle use the Outer 4096 Seating Position and Lower Anchorage Loops D and E DO NOT USE Outer 60 Seating Posi tion and Lower Anchorage Loops A and B 3 Outer 40 Seating Position Use Lower Anchorage Loops D and E If placing a second child seat in the vehicle use Outer 60 Seating Position and Lower Anchorage Loops A and B or Middle 6096 Seating Position and Lower An chorage Loops B and C Vehicle ISOFIX Positions Chart Mass Group nid Fixture grin ben Rear Center iudi v M M Cue Other Sites F ISO L1 X X X UF X IUF X Carrycot G ISO L2 X X X X IUF X X 1 X X X X X X 0 up to 10 kg E ISO R1 X X X IUF IUF IUF X 1 X X X X X X E ISO R1 X X X IUF IUF IUF X 0 up to 13 kg D ISO R2 X X X IUF IUF IUF X C ISO R3 X X X IUF IUF IUF X 1 X X X X X X D ISO R2 X X X IUF IUF IUF X C ISO R3 X X X IUF IUF IUF X 1 9 to 18 kg B ISO F2 X X X IUF IUF IUF X B1 ISO F2X X X X IUF IUF IUF X A ISO F3 X X X IUF IUF IUF X 1 X X X X X X I 15 to 25 kg 1 X X X X X X Ill
253. n continuously in the display 4 To complete the compass calibration drive the vehicle in one or more complete 360 degree circles under 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from power lines and large metallic ob jects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC features a driver interactive display It is located in the instrument cluster below the fuel and temperature gauges Vehicles equipped with steering wheel mounted buttons de scribed in this section are also equipped with the EVIC The EVIC consists of the following e Compass display e Outside temperature display e Trip computer functions e System status including vehicle information warning message displays and Tire Pres sure Monitor System TPMS displays if equipped and e Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features The system allows the driver to select informa tion by pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel 133 MENU Button Press and release this button and E the mode displayed will change between Compass Outside Tem perature Trip Functions System Status and Personal Settings RESET Button Press this button to reset Trip Functions and change Personal SCROLL Button Settings Press this button to scroll through Trip Functions Average Fuel Economy v Dist
254. n of the seat belt should be low on the hips and as snug as possible 7 Once the seat belt is long enough to fit properly insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click 022605394 44 8 To remove the slack from the lap belt pull upward on the shoulder portion of the seat belt 9 To release the seat belt push the red button on the buckle WARNING Be certain that the seat cushion is locked securely into position before using the seat Otherwise the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat cushion could cause serious injury Children too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirm ing or slouching can move the belt out of position e f the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoul der belt under an arm or behind their back WARNING e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The ch
255. n one second after the current track begins to play Press the switch up or down twice to listen to the second track three times to listen to the third track and so forth Press the button located in the center of the switch to change to the next preset that you have programmed CD DVD MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratching the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thin ner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a par ticular disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condi tion may be lessened or eliminated by relocat ing the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio perfor mance does no
256. n service number has to be setup before using To setup press the 4 button and say Setup Breakdown Service and follow prompts 69 Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the uconnect phone Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your uconnect phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated cus tomer service Some services require immedi ate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the uconnect phone When calling a number with your uconnect phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can press the button and say 70 the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the t button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying number or sequence of num bers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer ser vic
257. n the event of a rear impact The Active Head Restraint should be adjusted so the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear 030907652 Adjusted Head Restraint To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint on some models you may need to press the push button To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint 030907490 Push Button For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted forward and backward To tilt the head restraint closer to the back of your head pull outward on the bottom of the head restraint Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your head 022607494 Active Head Restraint Normal Position qu k Active Head Restraint Tilted 030907533 NOTE e The head restraints should only be re moved by qualified technicians for ser vice purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your au thorized dealer e In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint refer to Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR under Occupant Restraints in Section 2 WARNING e Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision The head restraints should al ways be checked prior to operating th
258. nd allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the Vehicle Sensitive Emergency Locking mode Seat Belt Pretensioners If Equipped The driver and front passenger s seat belts are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove any slack from the seat belt systems in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat 30 belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt must still be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occu pant Restraint Controller ORC Like the air bags the pretensioners are single use items After a collision deploys the airbags and or pretensioners a deployed airbag and or pre tensioner must be replaced immediately Supplemental Rear Impact Active Head Resiraints AHR These head restraints are passive deployable components and vehicles with this equipment can not be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspection of the head re straint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic How the Active Head Restraints AHR Work The Occupant Restraint Control
259. nded cold placard pres sure Once the low tire pressure warning Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light illuminates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the up dated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recom mended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 33 psi 227 kPa I the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi 193 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi 165 kPa This tire pressure is low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi 193 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be on In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value 187 CAUTION e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been estab lished for the tir
260. ne the seat lean forward slightly and lift the lever Then lean back to the position desired and release the lever To return the seatback to its normal upright position lean forward and lift the lever Release the lever once the seatback is in the upright position 82 Seatback Release WARNING Continued e Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked WARNING e Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be adjusted properly and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Continued Lumbar Support If Equipped The control lever is on the outboard side of the seatback Turn the control lever downward to increase the lumbar support or upward to de crease the lumbar support as desired Lumbar Control Driver Side Seat Height Adjustment If Equipped The control lever is located on the outboard side of the seat Raise the lever to raise the seat Lower the lever to lower the seat The total seat travel is 2 15 in 55 mm Seat Height Adjustment Lever Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat If Equipped This feature allows for extended cargo space When th
261. nflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel e Side airbags also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door Sit upright in the center of the seat 36 Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensors sig nals a central electronic ORC deploys the Ad vanced Front Airbags SABIC airbags if equipped Supplemental Side Seat Airbags if equipped and front seat belt pretensioners if equipped as required depending on severity and type of impact Advanced Front Airbags are designed to pro vide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Airbags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck under rides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initi
262. ng on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System ABS under Elec tronic Brake Control System in this section for more information WARNING The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ABS cannot prevent acci dents including those resulting from exces sive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe atten tive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system commonly re 176 ferred to as ESP This system includes Anti Lock Brake System ABS Brake Assist System BAS Traction Control System TCS Elec tronic Roll Mitigation ERM Electronic Stability Program ESP and on some models Hill Start Assist HSA These systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions Anti Lock Brake System ABS The Anti Lock Brake System ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake perfor mance under most braking conditions The system automatically pumps the brakes dur ing severe braking conditions to prevent wheel
263. ng Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 280 135 000 Miles 216 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule O O C Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tt Rotate tires If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals and replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 142 500 Miles 228 000 km or 114 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter t J Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 281 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Tt J Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter 1 Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped J Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Odomete
264. ng brake place the shift lever in NEUTRAL and press the clutch pedal before starting vehicle This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system It will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the loor Normal Starting Gasoline Engines NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal For vehicles not equipped with Tip Start turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds turn the ignition Switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 sec onds then repeat the Normal Starting proce dure For vehicles equipped with Tip Start turn the ignition switch to the START position and re lease it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F or 29 C Follow the same instructions in the Normal Starting procedure To ensure reliable starting at these tempera tures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater available from your autho rized dealer is recommended If Engine Fails To
265. ng the brake pedal e HSA is not a parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle Also be certain to leave a manual transaxle in REVERSE or first gear e Failure to follow these warnings can result in an accident or serious personal injury Disabling And Enabling HSA This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows NOTE You must complete Steps 1 through 7 within 90 seconds 1 Center the steering wheel front wheels pointing straight forward 2 Shift the transaxle into NEUTRAL manual transaxle 3 Apply the parking brake Start the engine Release the clutch pedal Das Rotate the steering wheel v2 turn to the left 7 Press the ESP OFF switch located in the lower switch bank below the climate controls four times within 20 seconds The ESP TCS Indicator Light should turn on and turn off two times 8 Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an additional V turn to the right 9 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then back to the ON position If the se quence was completed properly the ESP TCS Indicator light will blink several times to con firm HSA is disabled 10 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting 181 Trailer Sway Control TSC The TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recog nize an excessively swaying trailer TSC acti v
266. nge the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 288 120 000 Miles 180 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule OOOO DC OC C O C C O Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the fuel filter Inspect accessory drive belt replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals and replace if necessary Change the automatic transaxle fluid and external filter Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 130 000 Miles 195 000 km or 78 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 289
267. nger seats are equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system pro vides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchor ages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now available However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attach ments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retrofit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle 46 All three second row passenger seating posi tions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats You should NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats so that two seats share a common lower anchorage If installing child seats in adjacent seating positions or if your child restraints are not LATCH compatible in stall the restraints using the vehicle s seat belts 81ec00b1 Latch Anchorages 1 Outer 60 Seating Positio
268. ngine Inspect accessory drive belt replace if necessary Change the manual transaxle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 268 112 500 Miles 180 000 km or 180 Months Maintenance Service Schedule filter Tt Rotate tires Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system O O O C J Change the engine oil and engine oil Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals and replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 120 000 Miles 192 000 km or 192 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a a a m a a a a Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tT Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 2 4L Engine Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Change the automatic transaxle fluid amp filter Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chr
269. nlock automatically if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled 2 The transaxle was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transaxle is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver s door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Enter the vehicle and close all doors 2 Place the Key Fob in the ignition switch 3 Within 15 seconds cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK posi tion However do not start the engine 4 Within 30 seconds depress the power door unlock switch to unlock the doors 5 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming NOTE If you do not hear the chime it means that the system did not enter the programming mode and you will need to repeat the procedure 6 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock Sy
270. nnected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that 65 the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the uconnect phone and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone Owners Manual for specific in structions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection e If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will only use the first 24 characters Edit uconnect Phonebook Entries Editing names in the phonebook is recom mended when the vehicle is not in motion Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited e Press the to button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work cellular or pager that you wish to edit 66 e When prompted recite the new phone num ber for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a cellular and a home number but
271. ns the BI LEVEL mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets e Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather conditions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine over heating Refer to Cooling System under Maintenance Procedures and to Fluids Lu bricants and Genuine Parts in Section 7 for information pertaining to the cooling system and coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower settings This will ensure adequate system lu brication to minimize the possibility of compres sor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side window fogging be c
272. ns as noted Refer to Partial Off for additional infor mation Partial Off The ESP OFF button is located in the switch bank above the climate control To enter the Partial Off mode momentarily press the ESP OFF button and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will illuminate To turn the ESP on again mo mentarily press the ESP OFF button and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will turn off This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation 81dcfda9 ESP OFF Button NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driv ing with snow chains or when starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desir able to switch to the Partial Off mode by 179 momentarily pressing the ESP OFF but ton Once the situation requiring Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESP back on by momentarily pressing the ESP OFF but ton This may be done while the vehicle is in motion ESP BAS Warning Light and ESP TCS Indicator Light The malfunction indicator for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator The ESP BAS Malfunc tion Indicator Light and the ESP TCS Indicator Light in the instru ment cluster both turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should both turn off with the engine run ning If the ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light turns on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system or both If t
273. ntials that are traditional to our vehicles Before you start to drive this vehicle read this Owner s Manual and all the supplements Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls particularly those used for braking steering and transmission shifting Learn how your ve hicle handles on different road surfaces Your driving skills will improve with experience but as in driving any vehicle take it easy as you begin Always observe local laws wherever you drive NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient refer ence and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident Operating this vehicle at excessive speeds or while intoxicated may result in loss of control collision with other vehicles or objects going off the road or overturning any of which may lead to serious injury or death Also failure to use seat belts subjects the driver and passen gers to a greater risk of injury or death To keep your vehicle running at its best have your vehicle serviced at recommended inter vals by an authorized dealer who has the qualified personnel special tools and equip ment to perform all service The manufacturer and its distributors are vitally interested in your complete satisfaction with this vehicle If you encounter a service or warranty problem
274. o be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled at the irst opportunity WARNING Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tempo rary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control CAUTION Prolonged use of limited use spare or an incorrect tire size on either front wheel may damage transaxle differential and result in loss of vehicle mobility Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare whee since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Dam age to the vehicle may result Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or icy condi tions do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Secti
275. ocedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins imme diately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the Slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger seating positions with a combination lap shoulder belt When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a passenger 29 seating position Children 12 years old and younger should always ride buckled up in the rear seat How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull down ward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt a
276. omes a problem increase blower speed Ve hicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Side Window Demisters A side window demister outlet is located at each end of the instrument panel These non adjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in the Floor Mix or Defrost mode The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the out side mirrors Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the ple num they could plug the water drains In Winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter If Equipped The A C Air Filter will reduce but not eliminate diesel and agricultural smells The filter acts on air coming from outside the vehicle and recir culated air within the passenger compartment Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 for A C Air Filter service information or see your authorized dealer for service Refer to the Main tenance Schedule for filter service intervals 155 Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle press the 5 AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS
277. on mirror Power Sunroof Switch If Equipped Refer to Power Sunroof in Section 3 POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console 102 81d0200c Power sunroof Switch WARNING e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants par ticularly unattended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while op erating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Continued WARNING Continued e In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt prop erly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured e Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Opening Sunroof Manually Press and hold the switch in the rearward position Release the switch when the sunroof is in the position desired and it will stop moving f you continue to hold the switch in the rear ward position the sunroof will open fully and then stop automatically Release the switch once the sunroof stops moving Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release and the sunroof will open automatically from any
278. on 6 of this manual for additional information WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equip ment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced 055007576 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gaso line Replacement Tires The tires on your ne
279. on the Hazard Warning flashers 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked Spare Tire Removal NOTE On Seven Passenger Models fold the third row passenger seats flat This will provide more space when accessing the jacking tools and when operating the winch mecha nism 1 Remove the jack handle components 1 2 and 3 from storage and assemble them Lowering Raising Spare Tire NOTE Assemble components 2 and 3 by seating the small ball at the end of component 2 in the small hole at the end of component 3 This will lock these components together Assemble components 1 and 2 so that the wheel nut socket at the end of component 1 faces upward when seated on component 2 This will make it easier to rotate the assem bly when operating the winch mechanism 2 Fit the assembled jack handle over the winch drive nut located in the jack storage area Rotate the jack handle assembly counter clockwise until the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable slack to allow you to pull the spare tire out from underneath the vehicle CAUTION The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack handle only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and it can damage the winch
280. onal injury be sure to clear your arms hands fingers and objects from the window path before closing the window Such entrapment may result in serious injury 23 Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door trim panel allows you to disable the window control on the other doors To disable the window controls press and release the window lockout button setting it in the down position To enable the window controls press and re lease the window lockout button again setting it in the up position Window Lockout Switch 24 Reset It may be necessary at some point in time to reactivate the Auto up Auto down feature To do so perform the following steps 1 Pull the window switch up to close window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the per ception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear w
281. ontact on the engine ground Refer to the following illustration for jump starting con nections 81f4d79a Remote Jump Start Terminals 1 Positive Terminal 2 Negative Terminal 6 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few min utes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with Sentry Key Immobilizer turn the ignition switch to the ON position for three seconds before mov ing the ignition switch to the START posi tion 7 When removing the jumper cables reverse the sequence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan 8 Reinstall the protective cover over the re mote jump start positive battery post WARNING e Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The result ing electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury e During cold weather when temperatures are below the freezing point electrolyte ina discharged battery may freeze Do not at tempt jump starting because the battery could rupture or explode and cause per sonal injury Battery temperature must be brought above freezing point before at tempting a jump start NOTE Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Sec tion 7 for information on accessing the bat tery for service or replacement WARNING Any procedure other than above cou
282. ontrol at or near the 3 045607609 158 160 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally in jured Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch A child could operate power windows other controls or move the ve hicle e Do not leave animals or children inside parked vehicles in hot weather interior heat buildup may cause serious injury or death Automatic Transaxle If Equipped The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes before shifting into any driv ing gear 162 CAUTION Damage to the transaxle may occur if the following precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed e Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed e Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal Manual Transaxle If Equipped Apply the parki
283. ooster seat is for children weighing more than 40 Ibs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Integrated Child Booster Seat If Equipped The Integrated Child Booster Seat is located in each outboard second row passenger seat The Booster Seat is designed for children weighing between 48 and 85 Ibs 22 and 39 kg and between 47 in 119 cm and 57 in 145 cm tall To position a child into the Integrated Child Booster Seat follow these steps 1 Slide the second row seat to the full rear position to use the Integrated Child Booster Seat NOTE The second row bench with Integrated Child Booster Seat must remain in the full rear position during use 2 Pull the release loop forward to release the latch and seat cushion Release Loop 3 Lift the seat cushion up and push back to lock it in the booster seat position Booster Seat 43 4 Place the child upright in the seat with their back firmly against the seatback 5 Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt 6 Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around the child s lap NOTE The lap portio
284. or command translations and alternate com mands in supported languages refer to Com mand Translations Emergency Assistance If Equipped If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the uconnect phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the o button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the uconnect phone will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency number NOTE e The default number is 112 The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area e If supported this number may be pro grammable on some systems To do this press the button and say Setup followed by Emergency e The uconnect phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully mak ing a phone call as to that for the cellular phone directly WARNING Your phone must be turned on and paired to the uconnect phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cellular phone has network coverage and stays paired to the uconnect phone Breakdown Service If Equipped f you need Breakdown service e Press the te button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Breakdown service NOTE The Breakdow
285. or operation the next time you need it Cargo Management System Five Passenger System Features e A raised load floor that sits on top of a large built in storage bin e A tri fold door built into the load floor that allows easy access to items in the built in storage bin e 60 40 split second row passenger seats with fold flat feature which allows for extended cargo space Refer to Seats in this section e Anoptional front passenger seat with fold flat feature which extends cargo space even further Refer to Seats in this section e Cargo tie downs e Aretractable cargo area cover if equipped Seven Passenger System Features e A large built in storage bin with a hinged hardcover located in the floor behind the third row passenger seats e 60 40 split second row passenger seats with fold flat feature which allows for extended cargo space Refer to Seats in this section e 50 50 split third row passenger seats with fold flat feature which allows for extended cargo space Refer to Seats in this section e An optional front passenger seat with fold flat feature which extends cargo space even further Refer to Seats in this section e Cargo tie downs Cargo Tie Downs WARNING Cargo tie downs are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap In a sudden stop or collision a tie down could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose A child could be badly injured Use
286. ore the low glare surface Cleaning Interior Trim Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent then MOPAR Spot amp Stain Remover or equivalent if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery Cleaning Leather Upholstery MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifi cally recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stub born soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your eather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a eather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning pur poses Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respira tory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore diff
287. ormance of the emis Sions engine and automatic transaxle control Systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emissions well within current govern ment regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnos tic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible 228 CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emissions control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed e If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message f the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged the word gASCAP will display in the odometer If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap until a clicking sound is heard and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose impro
288. ots before backing up You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death CAUTION e To avoid vehicle damage ParkView should only be used as a parking aid The ParkView camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path e To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his her shoulder when using ParkView NOTE If snow ice mud or anything else builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens Turning ParkView On or Off With Navigation Radio 1 Press the menu hard key 2 Select system setup soft key 3 Press the camera setup soft key 4 Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting enable rear camera in reverse soft key 5 Press the save soft key 6 When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE an image of the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to check entire surround ings displayed across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear 7 When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear camera mode is exited and the navi gation or audio screen appears again Turning Park
289. ould be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to 234 remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubri cated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lu bricant or equivalent directly into the lock cyl inder Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield and rear window periodi cally with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumu lations of salt waxes or road film and help reduce streaking and smearing Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield or rear window Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield or rear window Make sure that they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to
290. our vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded e Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is inter rupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these conditions you will ob serve a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE e Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered nor mal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system e Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be ob tained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will in crease the steering fluid t
291. overall vehicle performance This sys tem can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery con ditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations Operation By placing the shift lever one shift level below the DRIVE position it can be moved from side to side This allows the driver to select a higher or lower range of gears Moving the shift lever to the left triggers a downshift and to the right an upshift The gear position will display in the instrument cluster on the trans axle range indicator NOTE In AutoStick mode the transaxle will only shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever to the right or left AutoStick is deactivated when the shift lever is moved out of the AutoStick position General Information e e You can launch the vehicle from a stop in any gear except top gear The system will ignore attempts to upshift into top gear at too low of a vehicle speed sixth for six speed fourth for four speed e lf a ratio other than first is selected and the vehicle is brought to a stop the transaxle control logic will automatically select the first gear ratio e Starting out in second gear is helpful in snow or icy conditions e Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is engaged e The transaxle will automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is reached while AutoStick is engaged e Transaxle shifting
292. p Starting 217 Engine Fails to Start 163 Manual Transmission 162 Starting and Operating 162 Starting Procedures 162 Starting Procedures Diesel Engines 164 Steering Column Lock sss 98 POWER du ure asc boi fs 172 73 THECOMMA oos dude a d muda gd 98 Wheel Tilt o o o o o o 98 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls 146 Storage baie pev ee ee 106 250 Storage Vehicle 155 Stuck Freeing 219 SUNROOF ues xo MEG eee 8 102 Sun Visor Extension 61 Sunglasses Storage 102 Sunroof Maintenance 103 Supplemental Restraint System AlrDag sea E eee it dung 32 Sway Control Trailer 2 00020 182 Synthetic Engine Oil 231 System Navigation uconnect gps 140 Taehomelter oreta ae a e 123 TallllghtS e daran rr 253 Telescoping Steering Column 98 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 150 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 122 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 46 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 15 Theft System Security Alarm 15 Tie Down Hooks Cargo 111 Tilt Steering Column 98 Time Delay Headlight 93 TipzStart sucre eder SF tea oes 12 MES oc aa itt te b iege E aaa 52 182 Aging Life of Tires 185 Ait PIeSSUIS s uice rm 182 CAINS 42 Baath Ook aren gestes Ge 4 18
293. perly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed perfor mance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufactur er s warranty MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engi neers who designed your vehicle Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when neces sary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle performance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealership or qualified repair center e Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air condi tioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunc tion use only the specified fluid for the flushin
294. phragm materials WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to pre vent carbon monoxide poisoning Continued 193 WARNING Continued e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the ve hicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short pe riod adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust System inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions re paired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open e Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from enter ing the vehicle 194 FLEXIBLE FUEL 2 7L ENGINE ONLY IF EQUIPPED E 85 General Information The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only These vehicles can be iden tified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol E 85 or Unleaded Gasoline Only This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common
295. position damage to the wiper motor may occur Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper system when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desir able Rotate the end of the windshield wiper washer control lever to the first detent and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval 031507503 Front Wiper Control There are five delay settings which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of two cycles every second to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between cycles at vehicles speeds below 10 mph 16 km h or from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds be tween cycles at vehicle speeds greater than 10 mph 16 km h NOTE The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph 16 km h delay times will be doubled Windshield Washers To use the washer pull the windshield wiper washer control lever toward you and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the delay range the wipers will operate in low speed for two or three wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then re sume the intermittent interval previously se lected If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the OFF position the wipers will operate for two or three wipe cycles and then turn OFF WA
296. prevents the rear wiper blade from return ing to the park position If the rear wiper control is turned off and the blade cannot return to the park position damage to the rear wiper motor may occur CAUTION Continued Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control panel Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mir rors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the win dow Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating ele ments Labels can be peeled off after soak ing with warm water e Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window 113 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED The roof rack cross rails and side rails are designed to carry cargo weight The load must not exceed 150 Ibs 68 kg and it should be distributed uniformly over
297. pulling the speed control lever toward you to CANCEL or normal brake pressure while slowing the ve hicle will deactivate the speed control without erasing the set speed from memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition OFF erases the set speed from memory To Resume Speed If you deactivate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory and your vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h you can resume the previous set Speed To do so push the lever upward to RESUME ACCEL and release and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal 99 To Vary the Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can increase speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME ACCEL lever If the lever is con tinually held in the RESUME ACCEL position the set speed will continue to increase until the lever is released then the new set speed will be established Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed increase Each time the lever is tapped speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 5 km h etc To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push down and hold the SET DECEL lever If the lever is continually held in the SET DECEL position the set speed will continue to decrease until the lever is released Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be estab lished Tapping the SE
298. r 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 2 7L Engine and Single or Dual Zone Climate Control System MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 9 8 Quarts 9 3 Liters 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 2 7L Engine and Three Zone Climate Control System MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 12 Quarts 11 4 Liters Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 2 0L Diesel Engine and Single or Dual Zone Climate Control System Glysantin G 30 91 7 9 Quarts 7 5 Liters Coolant or equivalent 2 0L Diesel Engine and Three Zone Climate Control System Glysantin G 30 91 Coolant or 9 8 Quarts 9 3 Liters equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 256 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Engine Coolant 2 4L and 2 7L Engines MOPARe Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technol ogy or equivalent Engine Coolant 2 0L Diesel Engine Glysantin G 30 91 or equivalent Engine Oi Non ACE 2 4L and 2 7L Engines A Categories Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 engine oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade SAE 5W 30 engine oil ap proved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 may be used when SAE 5W 20 engine oil is not available Engine Oi 2 4L and 2 7L Engines ACEA Categories For countries that use the ACEA European Oil Cat
299. r Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 15 000 Miles 24 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a a a DUDO Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tT Rotate tires If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 15 000 miles 24 000 km or 12 months Inspect the exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 15 000 miles 24 000 km or 12 months Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 22 500 Miles 36 000 km or 18 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tt Rotate tires Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals and replace if necessary O O O C Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 273 30 000 Miles 48 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter 1 Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped J Adj
300. r Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 150 000 Miles 240 000 km or 282 T This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions warranty WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Maintenance Schedule Diesel Engine The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for sched uled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Re quired will be displayed in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicles oil if it has been two years since your last oil change and even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated e Change your engine oil every 10 000 miles 15 000 km if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil
301. r all seating positions e Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passenger e Supplemental Rear Impact Active Head Re straints AHR located on top of the front seats integrated into the head restraint e Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Cur tains SABIC that span the front second and third row seating for the driver and passengers seated next to a window if equipped e Supplemental Side Seat Airbags if equipped e An energy absorbing steering column and Steering wheel e Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occu pants e Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event if equipped e All seat belt systems except the driver s include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired ength to restrain a child seat or secure a arge item in a seat if equipped If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more informa tion on LATCH see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH in this section 25 NOTE The Advanced Front Airbags have a multi stage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation ba
302. r risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly e No modifications or additions should be made by the user which will either prevent the seat belt adjusting devices from oper ating to remove slack or prevent the seat belt assembly from being adjusted to re move slack e Seat belts are designed to bear upon the bony structure of the body and should be worn low across the front of the pelvis or the pelvis chest and shoulders as applicable wearing the lap section of the belt across the abdominal area must be avoided Continued WARNING Continued e Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as possible consistent with comfort to pro vide the protection for which they have been designed A slack belt will greatly reduce the protection afforded to the wearer e Each belt assembly must only be used by one occupant it is dangerous to put a belt around a child being carried on an occu pant s lap e Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident
303. r to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals 10 000 Miles 15 000 km or 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 283 20 000 Miles 30 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Inspect accessory drive belt replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals and replace if necessary OOC CO C Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 30 000 Miles 45 000 km or 18 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the fuel filter Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes O O O C
304. r vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is program mable Refer to Key Off Power Delay under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC in Section 4 Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There are two fused 12 Volt 13 Amp power outlets located in the center console below the radio The power outlet on the top has power available when the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position The power outlet on the bottom has power available when the ignition switch is in the LOCK ON or ACC position 104 This power outlet will also operate a conven tional cigar lighter unit To preserve the heat ing element do not hold the lighter in the heating position Front Power Outlets 1 Switched Power 2 Battery Power A third fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the back of the center console This power outlet has power available when the ignition switch is in the LOCK ON or ACC position Rear Power Outlet A fourth fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the left quarter trim panel in the cargo area This power outlet has power available when the ignition switch is in the O
305. raining For users experiencing difficulty with the uconnect phone recognizing their voice com mands or numbers the uconnect phone Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two follow ing procedures From outside the uconnect phone mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the TS button for five sec onds until the session begins or e Press the TA button and say the Setup Voice Training command Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the uconnect phone For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched OFF This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts Voice Recognition VR For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror Always wait for the beep before speaking Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is Speaking during a voice recognition period Performance is maximized under low to medium blower setting low to medi
306. rbags if equipped Advanced Front Airbag Features The Advanced Front Airbag system has multi stage driver and front passenger airbags This System provides output appropriate to the se verity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the impact sen sors at the front of the car The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires airbag deploy ment The timing of the second stage deter 33 mines whether the output force is low medium or high If a low output is sufficient to meet the need the remaining gas in the inflator is ex pended WARNING e Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags may no longer be functional The protective cov ers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating e Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way e Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citi zen band radios etc Supplemental Side Seat Airbags If Equipped Supplemental side seat airbags provide en hanced protection and work together with supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to help protect an occupant during a 34 side impact The supplemental side seat air bag is marked with an air
307. re round V bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seat back and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersec tion of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces In addition there are tether strap anchorages located behind each rear seatback near to the floor Tether Strap Anchorages Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attach ment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the seat cover material Then attach the tether strap to the anchorage directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint being care ful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint preferably between the head restraint posts underneath the head restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you pu
308. regulation 2252125 which is based on ETC 300 220 but has addi tional unique requirements Other defined re quirements are noted in ANNEX VI of COMMIS SION DIRECTIVE 95 56 EC Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interfer ence e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two condi tions 1 A weak battery in the transmitter The ex pected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks To lock each door push the door lock plunger on each door trim panel downward To unlock the front doors pull the inside door handle to the first detent To unlock the rear doors pull the door lock plunger on the door trim panel upward Manual Door Lock Plunger If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door the door will lock Therefore make sure the key is not inside the vehicle before closing the door NOTE The manual door locks will not lock or un lock the liftgate WARNING e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle e When leaving the vehicle always
309. rgo floor or in the passenger compartment Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken from its mounting Do not store it in the vehicle REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Wiper Washer The rear window wiper washer control is lo cated on the right side of the steering column 036407502 Rear Window Wiper Washer Control Rotate the switch upward to the On position will activate the rear wiper Rotate the switch upward to the washer position will activate that rear washer The washer pump will continue to operate as long as the lever or ring is engaged Upon release the wipers will cycle three times before returning to the set position If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned to the LOCK position the wiper wil automatically return to the Park position When the vehicle is restarted the wiper wil resume function at whichever position the switch is set at CAUTION e Turn the rear wiper off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the rear wiper may result if the rear wiper switch is left in the on position Continued e In cold weather always turn off the rear wiper switch and allow the rear wiper to return to the park position before turning off the engine If the rear wiper switch is left on and the rear wiper freezes to the window damage to the rear wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted e Always remove any buildup of snow that
310. right so that the tire s tread is on the ground and the valve stem is at the top of the wheel and facing away from the rear of the vehicle 4 Tilt the retainer at the end of the winch cable and drop it through the center of the wheel Then place the spare tire with the cable and retainer underneath the vehicle Spare Tire Retainer 5 Fit the assembled jack handle over the winch drive nut Rotate the jack handle assem bly clockwise to raise the spare tire into the storage area Continue to rotate the jack handle assembly until you hear the winch mechanism click three times It cannot be over tightened Push against the tire several times to be sure it is held securely in place Jacking Instructions WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle e Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle e Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised e Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE e Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack e Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack e Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change Continued WARNING Continued
311. ring Play mode it will go to the next track in the list INFO Button Press the INFO button while a track is playing to see the information Track Title Artist Album etc for that track Each press of the INFO button will take you to the next screen of data for that track Once you have seen all of the screens the last press of the INFO button will take you back to the Play mode screen on the radio REPEAT Button Press the REPEAT button to repeat the current playing track SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button will play the first five seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song To stop the SCAN mode and start playing the desired track press the SCAN button again During the SCAN mode you can also press the SEEK button to the left or right to go to the previous or next tracks RND Random Button RES REL Radios Only Pressing the RND button will switch between the shuffle on and shuffle off modes of the iPod If the RND icon is showing on the radio display then the Shuffle mode is on List or Browse Mode During Play mode pressing any of the following buttons will take you to List mode List mode enables you to scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod device Tune Scroll Knob In the List mode the Tune Scroll knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod Turning the Tune Scroll knob clockwise for ward and counterclockwise backward
312. rol lever is located on the right side of the steering column The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch located at the end of the lever For information on using the rear window wiper washer refer to Rear Window Features in this section 036407502 Windshield Wiper Washer Lever 96 Windshield Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the lever upward to the LO position for low speed wiper operation Rotate the end of the lever upward to the HI position for high speed wiper operation 031507503 Front Wiper Control NOTE The wipers will automatically return to the park position if you turn OFF the ignition switch while they are operating The wipers will resume operation when you turn the ignition switch back to the ON position CAUTION e Turn the windshield wipers OFF when driv ing through an automatic car wash Dam age to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than OFF e In cold weather always turn OFF the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the park position before turning OFF the en gine If the wiper switch is left ON and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the ve hicle is restarted e Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the park position If the wind shield wiper control is turned OFF and the blades cannot return to the park
313. rough the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air con ditioning performance 148 Mode Control Mode control allows you to choose from sev eral selections of air distribution You can se lect either a primary mode as identified by the symbols or a blend of two of these modes The closer the control is to a particular mode the more air distribution you receive from that mode Panel Mode 7 Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted for direction and turned on or off to control airflow NOTE For maximum airflow to the rear the center instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear seat passengers Bi Level Mode 7 Air is directed through the panel and E floor outlets NOTE There is a difference in temperature in any conditions other than full cold or full hot between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Mode e Air is directed through the floor outlets e with a small amount through the defrost and side window demist outlets Mix Mode Ve Air is directed through the floor defrost b and side window demist outlets This Setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield This setting is good for maintaining
314. rvice list phones work call main menu return to main menu yes cancel mobile confirmation prompts confirmation mute on continue mute off delete new entry dial no VOICE RECOGNITION VR SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Voice Recognition VR System Operation e This Voice Recognition system al lows you to control your AM FM radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death When you press the Tu button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a com mand NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the ih button listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options
315. s This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions It allows you to stay comfortable while keeping the windshield clear Defrost Mode Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets Use DEFROST mode with maximum blower and tem perature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting NOTE While operating in the other modes the system will not automatically sense the presence of fog mist or ice on the wind shield DEFROST mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass ton allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air condition ing system When in SNOWFLAKE mode and the ATC display is on cool dehu midified air flows through the air outlets If ECONOMY mode is desired press the SNOW FLAKE button to turn off the SNOWFLAKE mode in the ATC display and deactivate the AIC system NOTE e If the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode the SNOWFLAKE can be turned off but the A C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows e If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass select DEFROST mode and increase blower speed x The SNOWFLAKE button or A C but Recirculation Control When outside air contains smoke odors or high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the RECIRCULATION mode control button RECIRCULATION mode CE should only be used temporarily The recircula
316. s a regulated substance requiring proper dis posal Check with your local authorities to de termine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by animals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level Four Cylinder Engines the coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating temperature the level of the coolant in the bottle should be between the ADD and FULL lines shown on the bottle 239 Six Cylinder Engines the level of the cool ant in the pressurized coolant bottle should be between the COLD and FULL range on the bottle when the engine is cold The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for coolant freeze point or replacing coolant Advise your service atten dant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional coolant is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points to Remember All Engines NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operat
317. s hydroplaning and may cause partial or com plete loss of vehicle control and stopping abil ity To reduce this possibility the following pre cautions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep the tires properly inflated 5 Maintain enough distance between your ve hicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle Flowing Rising Water WARNING Do not drive on or cross a road or a path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flowing water can wear away the road or path s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Further more flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you 171 Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water consider the ollowing Caution and Warning before doing so CAUTION e Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is d
318. s that the oil has been certified by the American Pe troleum Institute APD The manu facturer only rec ommends API Cer tified engine oils CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Selection Gasoline Engines ACEA Categories For countries that use the ACEA European Oi Categories for Service Fill Oils use engine oils that meet the requirements of ACEA C3 and that are approved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 Engine Oil Selection 2 0L Diesel Engine For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer recommends only Synthetic Die sel engine oils conforming to the most current version of ACEA C3 that are approved to VW 507 00 Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade Gasoline Engines SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil im proves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recom mended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to the Engine Compartment in this sec tion NOTE SAE 5W 30 engine oil approved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 may be used when SAE 5W 20 engine oil is not available Engine Oil Viscosity 2 0L Diesel Engine Use any of these viscosity grades meeting t
319. s module to compensate for that difference and ensure accuracy you can set the variance in the compass module to the zone where the vehicle is located according to the Compass Variance Map To set the vari ance perform the following steps NOTE e The default variance setting is Zone 8 When setting the variance the numbering will wrap around from Zone 15 to Zone 1 e Magnetic materials should be kept away from the top of the instrument panel as this is where the compass sensor is lo cated 137 138 12 col UA d Compass Variance Map 80bbc346 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC 3 Press the SCROLL button until COMPASS VARIANCE message and the last variance zone number displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release RESET button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and release the COMPASS TEM PERATURE button to exit Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the vehicle speed is at 0 mph 0 km h manual transaxle or when the shift lever is in PARK auto transaxle Press and release the MENU button until Per sonal Settings displays in the EVIC Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following choices LANG
320. s not in the ve hicle WARNING e Never use PARK position on an automatic transaxle as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Continued WARNING Continued e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally in jured e Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other con trols or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disen gaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and an accident e Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave an automatic transaxle in PARK a manual transaxle in REVERSE or first gear Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury CAUTION If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake sys tem serviced by an authorized dealer imme diately BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with dua hydraulic brake systems If either o the two hydraulic systems loses nor mal capability the remaining system will still function However there will be some loss o overall braking effe
321. s should oil change intervals exceed 7 500 miles 12 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the sched uled oil change If this scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your autho rized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Oil Change Required in Use Factory Settings of the EVIC section in this manual or under Odometer Trip Odometer in the Instrument Cluster Descriptions section of this manual At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once a Month e Check the tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake master cylinder power steering and transaxle and add as needed e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation At Each Oil Change e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the brake hoses and lines e Check the manual transaxle fluid level CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may res
322. s the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in the rear of the Key Fob The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead You can keep the emer gency key with you when valet parking To remove the emergency key slide the me chanical latch at the top of the Key Fob side ways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 020207762 Emergency Key Removal NOTE e You can insert the double sided emer gency key into the lock cylinder with ei ther side up Tip Start Feature If Equipped This feature automatically controls starter motor operation Refer to Normal Starting under Starting Procedures in Section 5 Ignition Key Removal Automatic Transaxle If Equipped Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the key to the LOCK position and then remove the key Manual Transaxle If Equipped Press the clutch pedal to the floor Bring the vehicle to a stop Place the shift lever in gear Apply the parking brake fully Turn the key to the LOCK position Remove the key NOTE e For vehicles not equipped with the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and ignition powered power outlets will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will c
323. scia will result e Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transaxle may result 222 NOTE If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc while being towed the key must be in the ON position not the ACC position Make certain the transaxle remains in NEUTRAL Vehicles Equipped with an Automatic Transaxle Your vehicle may be towed under the following conditions The shift lever must be in NEU TRAL the distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 miles 25 km and the towing speed must not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Exceeding these towing limits may cause a transaxle fail ure If the transaxle is not operative or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles 25 km the vehicle must be transported either with a flatbed truck or with the front wheels off the ground Vehicles Equipped with a Manual Transaxle ONLY vehicles equipped with a MANUAL TRANSAXLE may be flat towed at any legal highway speed for any distance if the MANUAL TRANSAXLE is in NEUTRAL and the ignition key is in the ACC position Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With A Tow Dolly Rear towing is not recommended with the front wheels on the ground as transaxle dam age can result If rear towing is the only alter native a front end dolly must be used Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle 224 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 4L 1
324. se a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Dry with a soft tissue 246 Cleaning The Cupholders Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent FUSES Totally Integrated Power Module The Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM is located in the engine compartment near the air cleaner assembly This center contains fuses and relays Hm SESS Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM CAUTION e When installing the power module cover it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the TIPM and possibly result in an electrical system failure e When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct am perage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected Car Car m Car E d A mage hie Description a tridge Eu Description p tridge cid Description use Fuse Fuse J1 40 Amp Power Folding J8 40 Amp Power Memory J18 20 Amp NGC Powertrain Green Seat Green Seat If Equipped Blue Control Module J2 30 Amp Transfer Case J9 40 Amp Flex Fuel PZE
325. se the unlock button on the transmitter and then immediately press and hold the unlock button until the windows lower to the level desired or until they lower com pletely Programming Additional Transmitters Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer Transmitter Battery Service The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE e Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate 17 e Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 Battery access is through a door located on the rear of the Key Fob Insert a small flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry open the access door 021305151 Battery Replacement 1 Battery Access Door 2 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 Reposition the access door panel over the battery opening and snap into place General Information Transmitter and receivers operate on a carrier frequency of 434 MHz as required by EEC regulations These devices must be certified to conform to specific regulations in each indi vidual country Two sets of regulations are involved ETS European Telecommunication Standard 300 220 which most countries use and German BZT federal
326. sed on severity and type of collision Please pay close attention to the informa tion in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buck led up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street 26 Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with a combination lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or impacts This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in a collision the belt will lock and reduce you
327. sh the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions NOTE e Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap e When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them In addition never leave unattended chil dren in the vehicle WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufactur er s directions exactly when installing an in fant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt To install a child restraint first pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route itthrough the belt path of the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Next extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor Finally pull on any excess web bing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it t
328. so be checked at this time CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air con ditioning system as the chemicals can dam age your air conditioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri cants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system Some unap proved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Continued WARNING Continued e The air conditioning system contains refrig erant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro luorocarbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product However the manufac turer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C sys tem sealers stop leak products seal condi tioners compressor oil and refrigerants A C Air Filter If Equipped Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Sec tion 8 for the proper maintenance intervals
329. solid The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driv ing next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPMS sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPMS sensors NOTE 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale Light will turn on upon the next ignition switch cycle 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 min utes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 sec onds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 sec onds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on th
330. ssible To release the parking brake pull the lever up slightly press the center button then lower the lever com pletely 81e7dc2b Parking Brake Automatic Transaxle If Equipped The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the park brake firmly push the park brake pedal fully To release the parking 174 brake press the park brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch ON the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate NOTE e When the parking brake is applied and the automatic transaxle is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the ve hicle e This light only shows that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade For vehicles equipped with an auto matic transaxle apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transaxle locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver i
331. st match vehicle uphill direction i e vehicle facing uphill is in for ward gear vehicle backing uphill is in RE VERSE gear e For vehicles equipped with a manual trans axle the HSA will work in REVERSE gear NEUTRAL and all forward gears WARNING There may be situations where the HSA will not activate and slight rolling may occur such as on minor hills i e less than 7 or with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer HSA is not a substitute for active driving involve ment It is always the driver s responsibility to be attentive to distance to other vehicles people and objects and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your ve hicle Failure to follow these warnings can result in an accident or serious personal injury Towing with HSA HSA will provide assistance during accelera tion on an incline while towing a trailer WARNING e Ifyou use a trailer brake controller with your trailer the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch If so there may not be enough brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released In order to avoid rolling down an incline while re suming acceleration manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasi
332. st never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the 178 system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the Partial Off mode Refer to ESP Elec tronic Stability Program in this section for more information Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steer ing wheel angle and vehicle s speed are suffi cient to potentially cause wheel lift it then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneu vers ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring durin
333. stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish CAUTION Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning mate rials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces Special Care e f you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercar riage at least once a month 244 It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and cargo area be kept clear and open If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the re sponsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to an acci dent or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your ve hicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsi bility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemi cals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wh
334. stem Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small chil dren riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with a Child Protection Door Lock system To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock System 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key or alike into the child lock control and rotate it to the LOCK position Child Lock Control 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door NOTE When the Child Protection Door Lock sys tem is engaged the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle even though the inside door lock is in the un locked position WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a colli sion Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death NOTE After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position 21 e For emergency exit with the system en gaged move the lock plunger up to the UNLOCK position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock System 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key or alike into the child lock control and rotate it to the UNLOCK position Child Lock Control 22 3 Repeat Steps 1
335. sult in serious injury or death Auto Down Feature The driver s power window switch has an Auto down feature Press the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To open the window part way press the window Switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop To stop the window from going all the way down during the Auto down operation pull up on the Switch briefly Auto Up Feature with Anti Pinch Protection If Equipped On some models the driver s and front passen gers power window switch has an Auto up feature Pull the window switch up to the sec ond detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way pull the window Switch up to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop NOTE e If the window runs into any obstacle dur ing Auto closure it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the ob stacle and use the window switch again to close the window e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function un expectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close window manu ally WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed To avoid pers
336. system service If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat at tachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer ap proved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify an advanced airbag System for persons with disabilities contact your authorized dealer 39 Airbag Warning Light O Y You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your protection in a collision While the airbag sys tem is designed to be mainte nance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system immediately e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on for approximately four to six seconds when the ignition switch is first turned ON e The light remains on after the approximate four to six second interval e The light comes on and remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any en gine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good 40 Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds
337. t accessory drive belt replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals and replace if necessary Change the automatic transaxle fluid and external filter Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 70 000 Miles 105 000 km or 42 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 286 80 000 Miles 120 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a a a OOC C O C Change the engine oil and engine oil filter f Rotate tires If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Inspect accessory drive belt replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and
338. t is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take itto a service center where it can be raised on a lift e The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Continued 212 WARNING Continued A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Jack Location The jack and jack handle are stowed under neath a cover in the rear storage bin in the cargo area Jack Storage Location Spare Tire Location The spare tire is stowed underneath the rear of the vehicle and is held in place by means of a cable winch mechanism Preparations For Jacking 1 Parkthe vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible avoid icy or slippery areas WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 2 Set the parking brake 3 Place the shift lever in PARK automatic transmission or REVERSE manual transmis sion 4 Turn OFF the ignition 5 Turn
339. t manufacturer s instructions for cleaning Do not drive your vehicle after the ai rbags have deployed If you are involved in another colli sion the airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioners and the front passenger seat belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Also have the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC system serviced as well Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING e Modifications to any part of the airbag sys tem could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards Continued WARNING Continued e It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag system The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any advanced airbag
340. t satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recom mended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS The Climate Control System allows you to regu late the temperature amount and direction of air circulating throughout the vehicle The con trols are located in the center stack of the instrument panel Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System 045607574 Single Zone Manual Climate Control Blower Control There are four blower Speeds Use this con trol to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The blower speed in creases as you move the control clockwise from the off position NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the O Off position 147 Temperature Control Use this control to regu late the temperature of the air inside the pas senger compartment Rotating the knob coun terclockwise from top center into the blue area indicates cooler temperatures Rotating the knob clockwise into the red area indicates warmer temperatures NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser located in front of the radia tor for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and th
341. t warnings will display in the EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC in this section for more information gASCAP Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged the word gASCAP will display in the odometer display area If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap until a click ing sound is heard Then press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII in Sec tion 7 for more information noFUSE If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the Ignition Off Draw IOD fuse is improp erly installed or damaged a noFUSE mes sage will display in the odometer display area For more information on fuses and fuse loca tions refer to Fuses in Section 7 CHAngE OIL Message If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine oil change indicator system If so equipped the CHAngE OIL message will flash in the instru ment cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change inter val The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent
342. t you dis tribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety haz ards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or suspension components do not nec essarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within the specified GVWR you must redis tribute the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the re quirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and
343. table and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disas semble or modify the system Seat belt as semblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage n the driver s seat and front passenger s seat the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push and fully depress the button above the webbing to release the anchorage then move it up or down to the position that fits you best Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that it is locked in position In the rear seat move toward the center of the seat to position the belt away from your neck Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following pr
344. ter approxi mately 30 minutes of continuous operation It will turn the heater and the remaining indicator light off after an additional 30 minutes of con tinuous operation If Low level heating is se lected the system automatically turns the heater and the indicator light off after approxi mately 30 minutes of continuous operation Press the switch once to select High level heating Press the switch a second time to select Low level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heat ing elements Off 86 NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medi cation alcohol use exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time e Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat CAUTION Repeated overheating of the seat could dam age the heating element and or degrade the material of the seat Second Row Passenger Seats To provide additional storage area each Second row passenger seat can
345. ter removing the gas cap place the gas cap tether cable over a hook on the inside of the fuel door This keeps the gas cap sus pended away from and protects the vehicle s surface 81bbf804 Fuel Filler Door 4 Rotate the ignition key back to the left to remove 5 To replace the cap insert it into the filler neck and tighten to the right until at least three clicks are heard CAUTION e Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into the fuel system Continued CAUTION Continued A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on e To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full NOTE When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full WARNING e The volatility of some gasoline may cause a buildup of pressure in the fuel tank that may increase while you drive This pressure can result in a spray of gasoline and or vapors when the cap is removed from a hot ve hicle Removing the cap slowly allows the pressure to vent and prevents fuel spray e Remove the fuel cap gas cap slowly to prevent fuel spray from the filler neck which may cause injury Continued WARNING Continued
346. the hood do not open the hood until the radia tor has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks All Engines Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber cracking tears cuts and tight ness of the connection at the bottle and radia tor Inspect the entire system for leaks Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Sec tion 8 for the proper maintenance intervals If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze solution Selection of Coolant Gasoline Engines Only Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct coolant type 237 CAUTION e Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT engine
347. the automatic transaxle fluid amp filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 265 67 500 Miles 108 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter O O O C 75 000 Miles 120 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter t Rotate tires 1 Rotate tires Inspect the CV joints 1 If using your vehicle in dusty or off road Inspect the exhaust system conditions inspect the engine air cleaner Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends filter and replace if necessary and boot seals and replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 82 500 Miles 132 000 km or 132 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tt J Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler D
348. the cross rails In addition the roof rack does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the roof rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity To Move the Cross Rails 1 Loosen the knobs on top of each cross rail approximately six turns to disengage the clamp tooth from the side rail 114 Roof Luggage Rack 2 Relocate the cross rails aligning the cross rail stanchions end pieces with one of the vertical marks on the outboard surface of the side rail for proper positioning There are four frontward marks for the front cross rail and four rearward marks for the rear cross rail Make sure the cross rails remain equally spaced or parallel at any position for proper function 3 Tighten the knobs on each cross rail to lock it in position As you tighten the knob make sure the clamp tooth engages completely into the side rail slot 4 Attempt to move the cross rail to ensure that it is locked in position NOTE e To help control wind noise when install ing the cross rails make sure the arrows marked on the underside of the cross rails face the front of the vehicle e To help reduce the amount of wind noise when the cross rails are not in use fasten the front cross rail in the fourth position from the front and the rear cross rail in the eighth position The tie down holes on the cross rail ends should always be used to t
349. the fog lamp housing and rotate the connector Ya turn clockwise to lock it in place 7 Reinstall the fog lamp housing Side Repeater Lamp The side repeater lamps are located in both front fender panels 1 Push the side repeater lens to left side to release the spring tension and then pull it outward 2 Disconnect the bulb from the harness con nector and then connect the replacement bulb c Ee D n a a gt aS 818de640 SEEN Side Repeater Bulb Removal 3 Engage the right hook of the side repeater lamp into the sheet metal note correct orienta tion of lettering on lens 4 Rotate the side repeater lamp in place until the left side engages you will hear a light Click Tail Stop Rear Turn Signal Tail and Backup Lamp The taillamps are a two piece design The tail stop lamps and rear turn signal lamps are located in the rear corner body panels The tail and backup lamps are located in the liftgate 253 Changing the Tail Stop Lamp or Rear Turn Signal Lamp 1 Open the liftgate 2 Remove the two fasteners from the inboard side of the taillamp housing 3 Carefully insert a trim stick plastic flat blade tool between the body panel and the outboard side of the taillamp housing with one hand and grasp the flange on the inboard side of the taillamp housing with the other hand Use the trim stick and hand pressure together to disen gage the taillight housing from the vehicle
350. the reset button for approximately two seconds When the appropriate conditions exist the fol lowing messages will display NE wt odas Eight point compass headings are displayed N S E W NE NW SE SW 14 F Temperature Fahrenheit or Celsius ANG csi Average Fuel Economy English or Metric DTE s pan soc be ERG Distance to Empty ETS iue dee SUR Elapsed Time CMTC Trip Odometer ODO This display shows the distance traveled since the last reset Press and release the right button on the instrument cluster to switch from odom eter to trip A or trip B Press and hold the right button while the odometer trip odometer is displayed to reset Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset Compass Temperature Display Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To en sure compass accuracy the compass variance should be properly set according to the vari ance map for the zone where the vehicle will be driven When properly set the compass will automatically account for this difference NOTE e A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metal lic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc e Magnetic and battery powered devices such as cell phones iPod s radar detec tors PD
351. the seat only while the vehicle is parked Continued WARNING Continued e Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Seatback Armrest Second Row Passenger Seat The latch release loop is located at the top of the seatback armrest Pull the release loop up ward to release the latch and then downward to lower the seatback armrest Latch Release Loop Raise the seatback armrest and lock it in place when not in use or when additional seating area is required WARNING Keep the latch clean and free of objects and be certain that the seatback is locked securely into position Otherwise the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury Stadium Tip n Slide Easy Entry Exit Seat Seven Passenger Models This feature allows passengers to easily enter or exit the third row passenger seats from ei ther side of the vehicle To Move the Second Row Passenger Seat Forward NOTE Raise the seatback armrest before moving the 60 seat to allow for full seat travel Move the control lever on the upper outboard side of the seatback forward and in one fluid motion the seat cushion flips upwar
352. tion 7 Turn Signal Indicator Light The left or right arrow will flash in unison with the corresponding front and rear turn signal lights when the turn signal switch is operated Refer to Turn Signals under Lights in Section 3 for more information NOTE e A chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mi 1 6 km with either turn signal on e Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate 8 High Beam Indicator Light This light shows that the high beam headlights are on Pull the multifunc tion lever on the left side of the steering column toward you to switch to low beam Refer to Highbeam Lowbeam Select Switch under Lights in Section 3 for more informa tion 9 Speedometer Shows the vehicle speed 10 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash rapidly for ap proximately 16 seconds when the o vehicle security system is arming and then flash slowly when the System is armed The light will also turn on for about three seconds when the ignition switch is first turned ON Refer to Vehicle Security Alarm in Section 2 for more information 11 Position Light Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on Refer to Headlights and Parking Lights under Lights in Section 3 for more information 30 oz 12 Tachometer This gauge measures engine revol
353. to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled The BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h NOTE e The BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer e The manufacturer of this vehicle does not recommend deactivating the BeltAlert e If the BeltAlert is deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illu minate as long as the driver s seat belt is unbuckled retracted Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbags This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compart ment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers 81f4d757 1 Driver s Airbag 2
354. ton to stop recording You proceed b saying one of the following commands Save to save the memo Continue to continue recording Delete to delete the recording e Play Memos to play previously recorded memos During the playback you may press the TS button to stop playing memos You proceed by saying one of the following commands Repeat to repeat a memo Next to play the next memo Previous to play the previous memo Delete to delete a memo e Delete All to delete all memos System Setup To switch to system setup say Setup In this mode you may say the following commands e Language German e Language Dutch e Language Italian e Language English e Language French e Language Spanish e Tutorial e Voice Training NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the button first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In commands Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the sys tem recognizing their voice commands or num bers the uconnect voice Voice Training feature may be used 1 Press the amp button say System Setup and once you afe in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by uconnect voice For best re sults the Voice Tra
355. tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equip ment permanent or temporary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in com bination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 Ibs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the ve hicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force ex erted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 7 or more than 10 of the trailer load Tongue weight must not exceed the lesser of either the hitch certification rating or the trailer tongue chassis rating It should nev
356. tures under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the lock button on a pro grammed transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the unlock button while still holding the lock button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the lock unlock buttons on the transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the lock button on the transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the unlock button to deactivate the Security Alarm Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Flash Light With Lock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press and ho
357. uel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the RESET button 136 NOTE Significant changes in driving style or ve hicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 mi 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display e Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position e Units In The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the RESET button until U S or METRIC appears To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the RE SET button once to clear the resettable function being displayed To reset all resettable func tions press and release the RESET button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed function gt Reset ALL will display during this three second window Compass Displ
358. uising Range Because E 85 fuel contains less energy per gallon liter than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel consumption You can ex 195 pect your miles per gallon mpg miles per liter and your driving range to decrease by about 30 compared to gasoline operation Replacement Parts Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with etha nol Always be sure that your vehicle is ser viced with correct ethanol compatible parts CAUTION Replacing fuel system components with non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle Maintenance CAUTION Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your vehicle It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect driveability 196 FUEL REQUIREMENTS DIESEL ENGINES Use Premium Quality Diesel fuels with a Cetane rating of 50 or higher and meeting the EN590 standard are highly recommended See your authorized dealer for further information re garding fuels available in your area ADDING FUEL Locking Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The locking gas cap is behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replace ment cap is for use with this vehicle 1 Turn off the engine 2 Insert the ignition key into the fuel cap and turn the key one quarter turn to the right then rotate the fuel cap to the left to remove 3 Af
359. ult in damage to the vehicle Maintenance Schedule 2 4L Gasoline Engine Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals Severe Duty Conditions t Change the engine oil and engine oil filter at every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months if using your vehicle under any of the following severe duty conditions e Stop and go driving e Driving in dusty conditions e Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 km e Trailer towing e Taxi police or delivery service commercial service e Off road or desert operation 261 7 500 Miles 12 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter t 1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 15 000 Miles 24 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary 1 Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary 1 Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped 1 Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 15 000 miles 24 000 km or 24 months 1 Inspect the exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 15 000 miles 24 000 km or 24 months
360. um vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather conditions Even though the system is designed for users speaking in European English Dutch French German Italian or Spanish accents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated sys tem such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sound ing names in the uconnect phonebook Phonebook Downloaded and uconnect phone Local name recognition rate is opti mized when the entries are not similar Numbers must be spoken in single digits 800 must be spoken eight zero zero not eight hundred You can say O letter O for O zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported In a convertible vehicle system perfor mance may be compromised with the con vertible top down 73 Phone Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under 74 low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle speed low road noise smooth road surface fully closed windows dry weather conditions and operation from the driver seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a
361. up Confirmations The uconnect phone will play the current con firmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cellular phone the uconnect phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using uconnect phone The status is given for roaming network signal strength phone bat tery strength etc Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the uconnect phone while dialing via the cellular phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dial ing a number with your paired Bluetooth cel lular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The uconnect phone will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of cellular phones do not send the dial ring to the uconnect phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute Off When you mute the uconnect phon
362. upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position To turn off the message tem porarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position NOTE e If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indi cator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure e Performing reset procedure Steps 1 through 3 allows for a 12000 km service interval for engine oil and filter changes 16 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Warning Light If Equipped This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check when the ignition switch is turned ON This light will also turn on while the engine is running if there is a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If the light turns on while the engine is running safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible place the shift lever in PARK and cycle the ignition key The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However s
363. ure someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 sec onds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a Spinning wheel no matter what the speed 220 TOW EYE Your vehicle is equipped with a tow eye that can be used to rescue your vehicle should it become stranded off road 061409191 Tow Eye CAUTION Tow eyes are for emergency use only to rescue a vehicle stranded off road Do not use tow eyes for tow truck hookup or highway towing You could damage your vehicle Tow straps are recommended when towing the vehicle chains may cause vehicle damage WARNING Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow eyes Tow straps and chains may break caus ing serious injury Front Tow Eye Usage The front tow eye receptacle is located on the lower right side of the front fascia To install the tow eye remove the rubber plug and thread the tow eye into the receptacle Insert the flat end of the jack handle through the eye and tighten refer to Jacking and Tire Changing in Section 6 for information The tow hook must be fully seated to the attaching bracket through the lower front fascia as shown If the tow hook is not fully seated to the attaching bracket the vehicle should not be towed 061409275 Front Tow Eye Installed Rear Tow Eye Usage The rear tow eye receptacle is located behind a door located
364. ure to read the Owner s Manual first before driving your vehicle and before at taching or installing parts accessories or making other modifications to the vehicle In view of the many replacement parts and accessories from various manufacturers avail able on the market the manufacturer cannot be certain that the driving safety of your vehicle will not be impaired by the attachment or instal lation of such parts Even if such parts are officially approved for example by a general operating permit for the part or by constructing the part in an officially approved design or if an individual operating permit was issued for the vehicle after the attachment or installation of such parts it cannot be implicitly assumed that the driving safety of your vehicle is unim paired Therefore neither experts nor official agencies are liable Therefore the manufacturer only assumes responsibility when parts which are expressly authorized or recommended by the manufacturer are attached or installed at an authorized dealer The same applies when modifications to the original condition are sub sequently made on the manufacturers ve hicles Your warranties do not cover any part that the manufacturer did not supply Nor do they cover the cost of any repairs or adjustments that might be caused or needed because of the installation or use of non manufacturer parts components equipment materials or addi tives Nor do your warranties cov
365. ust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes 37 500 Miles 60 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter T 11 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 274 45 000 Miles 72 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a a a O O O C O Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tt Rotate tires If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals and replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 52 500 Miles 84 000 km or 42 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter t 1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 275 60 000 Miles 96 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil fi
366. utions per minute RPM x 1000 Before the pointer reaches the red area ease up on the accelera tor to prevent engine damage 13 Shift Lever Indicator Vehicles Equipped with Automatic Transmission The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission 14 Seat Belt Reminder Light This light will turn on for several sec onds after the ignition switch is turned ON as a reminder to buckle up This light will remain on as long as the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled Refer to 123 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert under Occupant Restraints in Section 2 for more information 15 Odometer Trip Odometer The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage Refer to Trip Odometer Button for additional information Vehicle Odometer Messages When the appropriate conditions exist the fol lowing messages will display in the odometer hood 4 4i sen Hood Ajar GOOF ud RR SUA Door Ajar GATE osos ba Liftgate Ajar gASCAP Fuel Cap Fault noFUSE Fuse Fault CHAngE OIL Oil Change Required LoCOOL Low Coolant LoWASH Low Washer Fluid ESPOFF ESP Deactivated 124 NOTE If the instrument cluster is equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC then mos
367. vehicle s frame Refer to the following chart to determine the accurate attaching points Other equip ment such as trailer sway controls and braking equipment trailer equalizing leveling equip ment and low profile mirrors may also be required or strongly recommended BALL CENTER MOUNTING HOLES WHEEL CENTERLINE BObcea6t Trailer Tow Hitch Attaching Points And Overhang Dimensions A N A B 14 5 in 366 71 mm C 19 75 in 501 62 mm D 24 75 in 628 69 mm E maximum overhang 41 5 in 1051 93 mm F 18 5 in 472 00 mm RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground Recreational Manual Automatic Towing Transaxle Transaxle Condition Vehicles Vehicles Four Wheel Flat Yes Never Tow All Wheels on Ground Two Wheel Dolly Yes Yes Tow Rear Wheels on Ground Flat Bed Tow All Yes Yes Wheels on Bed of Truck NOTE ONLY vehicles equipped with a MANUAL TRANSAXLE may be recreationally towed flat towed at any legal highway speed for any distance if the MANUAL TRANSAXLE is in NEUTRAL and the ignition key is in the ACC position CAUTION e DO NOT FLAT TOW any vehicle equipped with an AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE Dam age to the drivetrain will result If these vehicles require towing make sure all four wheels are off the ground e Front or rear wheel
368. w Map Pocket and Grocery Retainers If Equipped csc ee sie aa wei wees RES DEUS e In Floor Storage Bin with Removable Liner e CHILL ZONE BEVERAGE COOLER STORAGE COMPARTIMENTO Chill Zone Beverage Cooler Operation e CARGO AREA FEATURES 3 o eee e Rechargeable Flashlight If Equipped e Cargo Management System 57 58 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical mirror adjustment Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window 81f4d4ad Manual Rearview Mirror Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward rear of vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward windshield Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light will illuminate next to the switch when the automatic dimming feature is activated 1 Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during clean ing never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lan
369. w vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be in spected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed refer to the para graph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service de scription and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use 185 equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire speci fications or capability WARNING e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimen sions and performance characteristics re sulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steer ing and suspension components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Continued 186 WARNING Continued e Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacit
370. when you need to slow down or stop e The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded e The ABS cannot prevent accidents includ ing those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents e The capabilities of an ABS equipped ve hicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the users safety or the safety of others All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly in flated to produce accurate signals for the com puter Anti Lock Brake Light The Anti Lock Brake Light moni tors the ABS The light will turn on ss when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds Ifthe ABS Light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the anti lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the Brake System Warning Light is not on If the ABS Light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti lock brakes If the ABS Light
371. will ikely indicate a high temperature when driving in hot weather up mountain grades in heavy traffic or when towing a trailer If the pointer rises to the H mark safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the Air Conditioning A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transaxle into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle If the needle remains on the H mark turn the engine OFF immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in Section 6 for more information NOTE The gauge pointer will remain near its last reading when the engine is turned off It will return to a true reading when the engine is restarted 122 CAUTION Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the engine running as you would not be able to react to the temperature indicator light if the engine overheats 2 Fuel Gauge The fuel gauge shows the level of fuel in the tank when ignition switch is in the ON position 3 Fuel Cap Indicator This symbol indicates the side of E the vehicle where the fuel filler cap is located 4 Coolant Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated en E gine condition If the light turns on wwe while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transaxle into NEU TRAL and idle the vehicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If
372. will be more noticeable when AutoStick is engaged e f a low range is selected and the engine accelerates to the rev limit the transaxle will automatically select the next higher ratio e f a downshift would cause the engine to over speed that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine e Mostly the transaxle will stay in the manually selected ratio however f the system detects powertrain over heating the transaxle will revert to the automatic shift mode and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off f the system detects a problem it will disable the AutoStick mode and the transaxle will return to the automatic mode until the problem is corrected DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slippery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull erratically to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front driving wheels Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sud den pulling of the front wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have an accident Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc WARNING Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This i
373. with the A C turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine OFF immediately and call for service NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supple ment to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot 211 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING e Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel e Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dan gerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle tha
374. ws you to plug an iPod mobile digital device into the vehicle s sound system through a connector UCI connector using an optional connection cable available through MOPAR See your authorized dealer for de tails Using this feature e the iPod audio can be played on the vehi cles sound system providing metadata Track Title Artist Album etc information display on radio 143 e the iPod can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod contents The iPod battery charges when plugged into the UCI connector if supported by the specific iPod device Connecting The iPod Device Use the optional connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s UCI connector which is located in the glove box or center console on some vehicles This location may vary with vehicle Once the iPod is connected and synchronized to the vehicle system this may take a few seconds to connect the vehicle brand logo appears on the iPod display and it starts charging and is ready for use by press ing radio switches as described below Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons To get into the UCI iPod mode and access a connected iPod press the AUX button on the radio faceplate Once in the UCI iPod mode the iPod audio track if available from iPod will start playing over the vehicle audio system 144 Play Mode When switched to UCI mode the iPod will be in Pl
375. xpected when using ethanol blended fuels due to the lower energy content of ethanol Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While TBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol CAUTION Use of fuel with Ethanol content higher than 10 may result in engine malfunction starting and operating difficulties and materials deg radation These adverse effects could result in permanent damage to your vehicle Clean Air Gasoline any gasolines are now being blended to contribute to cleaner air especially in those areas where air pollution levels are high These new blends provide a cleaner burning fuel and some are referred to as reformulated gaso line The manufacturer supports these efforts toward cleaner air You can help by using these blends as they become available Materials Added to Fuel Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating gasolines that contain detergents corrosion and stability additives are recommended Using gasolines that have these additives will help improve fuel economy reduce emissions and maintain vehicle perfor mance Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be avoided Many of these ma terials intended for gum and varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredi ents These can harm fuel system gasket and dia
376. y other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have an accident e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sud den tire failure and loss of vehicle control CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings TIRE CHAINS Due to limited clearance tire chains are not recommended CAUTION Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are used TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear patterns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Sec tion 8 for the proper maintenance intervals More frequent rotation is permissible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed The suggested rotation
377. y or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Replace the spark plugs 2 7L Engine Flush and replace the engine coolant Inspect accessory drive belt replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 112 500 Miles 180 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tt Rotate tires Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals and replace if necessary O O O C Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 279 120 000 Miles 192 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Tt J Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter 1 Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped 1 Change the automatic transaxle fluid and external filter J Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes 127 500 Miles 204 000 km or 102 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter t 1 Rotate tires Odometer Readi
378. you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit fea ture NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Delete uconnect Phonebook Entry e Press the to button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the ih button while the uconnect phone is playing the desired entry and say Delete e After you enter the name the uconnect phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work cellular pager or all Say the designation you wish to delete e Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Delete Erase All uconnect Phonebook Entries e Press the to button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All e The uconnect phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook e After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted e Note that only the phonebook in the
379. ysler Dealer 269 127 500 Miles 204 000 km or 204 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Tt J Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 135 000 Miles 216 000 km or 216 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tt 1 Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary 1 Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary 1 Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped 1 Inspect the CV joints 1 Inspect the exhaust system 1 Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals and replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 270 142 500 Miles 228 000 km or 228 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 150 000 Miles 240 000 km or 240 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Tt Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 2 4L Engine Inspect the brake linings and replace as necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped LJ Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with

"user manual"

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

&quot;user manual&quot;

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

"user manual"